




COFYRIGirr DEPOSm 


i 

t 

( 

I 

i 

► 

<. 

H 

I 

\ 

1 

i 


f. 

I 


I 


t 












I 


I 

'k 


i 

I 


I 


> 

,1 


!■ 




I 


I 



JUTHOR^S EDITION 


WORKS OF 
ANTHONY HOPE 

With Preface and Notes 
by the Author, and 
Photogravure Illustration 


B A L I O L 

Limited to One Thousand 
Sets, of which this is 

N u mb e r 







i ■ 


1 



a 


\ 







I 


f 


y • 


tv 

« } 






4 






I 





'' ' I 


i 


» / 




K'^ 

w^> , 


V' 






4 











THE CHRONICLES 
COUNT ANTONIO 


By ANTHONY HOPE 


ILLUSTRATED 



D. APPLETON AND COMPANY 
NEW YORK 



TZ3 

.Wii 


THE library of 
CONGRESS, 

Two Copies Received 

OCT 3 t903 I 

Copyright Entry 
CUSS XXa No 

v-5 / a 4. 

COPY A. i 


Copyright, 1902, by 
ANTHONY HOPE HAWKINS 


All rights reserved 



CopyrigM, 1895, by 
Anthony Hope 

Copyright, 1896, by 
D. Appleton and Company 


(T' r 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER PAGE 

I. How Count Antonio Took to the Hills 1 
H. Count Antonio and the Traitor Prince 35 
HI. Count Antonio and the Prince of 

Mantivoglia . . . . .64 

IV. Count Antonio and the Wizard’s Drug 104 

V. Count Antonio and the Sacred Bones 141 

VI. Count Antonio and the Hermit of the 

Vault ...... 180 

VH. Count Antonio and the Lady of Rilano 218 
VHI. The Manner of Count Antonio’s Return 258 



THE CHRONICLES 

OF 

COUNT ANTONIO 

CHAPTER I 

HOW COUNT ANTONIO TOOK TO THE HILLS 

Countless are the stories told of the sayings 
that Count Antonio spoke and of the deeds 
that he did when he dwelt an outlaw in the 
hills. For tales and legends gather round his 
name thick as the berries hang on a bush, and 
with the passage of every succeeding year it 
grows harder to discern where truth lies and 
where the love of wonder, working together 
with the sway of a great man’s memory, has 
wrought the embroidery of its fancy on the 
plain robe of fact. Yet, amid all that is of 
uncertain knowledge and so must rest, this 
much at least should be known and remem- 
bered for the honour of a noble family, how 
it fell out that Count Antonio, a man of high 
lineage, forsook the service of his Prince, dis- 
dained the obligation of his rank, set law at 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


naught, and did what seemed indeed in his 
own eyes to be good but was held by many to 
be nothing other than the work of a rebel and 
a brigand. Yet, although it is by these names 
that men often speak of him, they love his 
memory; and I also, Ambrose the Franciscan, 
having gathered diligently all that I could 
come by in the archives of the city or from 
the lips of aged folk, have learned to love it in 
some sort. Thus I am minded to write, before 
the time that I must carry what I know with 
me to the grave, the full and whole truth con- 
cerning Antonio’s flight from the city and the 
Court, seeking in my heart, as I write, excuse 
for him, and finding in the record, if little else, 
yet a tale that lovers must read in pride and 
sorrow, and, if this be not too high a hope, that 
princes may study for profit and for warning. 

Now it was in the tenth year of the reign 
of Duke Valentine over the city of Firmola, 
its territories and dependent towns, that Count 
Antonio of Monte Velluto — having with him a 
youthful cousin of his, whom he loved greatly, 
and whom, by reason of his small stature and 
of a boyish gaiety he had, men called Tom- 
masino — came from his own house on the hill 
that fronts the great gate of the city, to the 
palace of the Duke, with intent to ask His 
2 


COUNT ANTONIO IN THE HILLS 


Highness’s sanction for his marriage with the 
Lady Lucia. This lady, being then seventeen 
years of age, loved Antonio, and he her, and 
troth had been privily plighted between them 
for many months ; and such was the strength 
and power of the love they bore the one to the 
other, that even to this day the old mock at 
young lovers who show themselves overfond, 
crying, “ ’Tis Lucia and Antonio ! ” 

But since the Lady Lucia was an orphan, 
Antonio came now to the Duke, who enjoyed 
wardship over her, and setting out his passion 
and how that his estate was sufficient and his 
family such as the Duke knew, prayed leave of 
His Highness to wed her. But the Duke, a 
crafty and subtle prince, knowing Antonio’s 
temper and the favour in which he was held 
by the people, counted not to augment his 
state and revenues by the gift of a bride so 
richly dowered, but chose rather to give her to 
a favourite of his, a man in whose devotion he 
could surely trust and whose disposition was 
to serve his master in all things fair and foul, 
open or secret. Such an one the Duke found 
in the Lord Robert de Beauregard, a gentleman 
of Provence, who had quitted his own country, 
having been drawn into some tumult there, 
and, having taken service with the Duke, had 
3 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


risen to a great place in his esteem and confi- 
dence. Therefore, when Antonio preferred his 
request, the Duke, with many a courteous re- 
gretful phrase, made him aware that the lady 
stood promised to Robert by the irrevocable 
sanctity of his princely pledge. 

So forget, I pray you, my good cousin 
Antonio,”said he, “forget, as young men light- 
ly can, this desire of yours, and it shall be my 
charge to find you a bride full as fair as the 
Lady Lucia.” 

But Antonio’s face went red from brow to 
chin, as he answered : “ My gracious lord, I 
love the lady, and she me, and neither can wed 
another. As for my Lord Robert, your High- 
ness knows well that she loves him not.” 

“ A girl’s love ! ” smiled the Duke. “ A 
girl’s love! It rains and shines, and shines 
and rains, Antonio.” 

“ It has shone on me since she knew a man 
when she looked on him,” said Antonio. 

And Tommasino, who stood by, recking as 
httle of the Duke as of the Duke’s deerhound 
which he was patting the while, broke in, say- 
ing carelessly, “ And this Robert, my lord, is 
not the man for a pretty girl to love. He is a 
sour fellow.” 

“ I thank you for your counsel, my lord 
4 


COUNT ANTONIO IN THE HILLS 


Tommasino,” smiled the Duke. “Yet I love 
him.” Whereat Tommasino lifted his brows 
and patted the hound again. “ It is enough,” 
added the Duke. “ I have promised, Antonio. 
It is enough.” 

“Yes, it is enough,” said Antonio; and he 
and Tommasino, having bowed low, with- 
drew from the presence of the Duke. But 
when he got clear outside of the Duke’s cab- 
inet, Antonio laid his hand on Tommasino’s 
shoulder, saying, “ It is not well that Robert 
have her.” 

“ It is mighty ill,” said Tommasino. 

And then they walked in silence to the city 
gate, and, in silence still, climbed the rugged 
hill where Antonio’s house stood. 

But the Duke sent for Robert de Beauregard 
into his cabinet and said to him : “ If you be 
wise, friend Robert, little grass shall grow under 
your feet this side your marriage. This An- 
tonio says not much ; but I have known him 
outrun his tongue with deeds.” 

“ If the lady were as eager as I, the matter 
would not halt,” said Robert with a laugh. 
“ But she weeps and spits fire at me, and cries 
for Antonio.” 

“ She will be cured after the wedding,” said 
the Duke. “ But see that she be well guarded, 
5 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


Robert ; let a company of your men watch 
her. I have known the bride to be missing on 
a marriage day ere now.” 

“ If he can touch her, he may wed her,” cried 
Robert. ‘‘The pikemen are close about her 
house, and she can neither go in nor come forth 
without their knowledge.” 

“ It is well,” said the Duke. “ Yet delay 
not. They are stubborn men, these Counts of 
Monte Velluto.” 

Now had the Lady Lucia been of a spirit as 
haughty as her lover s, it may be that she would 
have refused to wed Robert de Beauregard. 
But she was afraid. When Antonio was with 
her, she had clung to him, and he loved her 
the more for her timidity. With him gone 
and forbidden to come near her, she dared not 
resist the Duke’s will nor brave his displeas- 
ure; so that a week before the day which the 
Duke had appointed for the wedding, she sent 
to Antonio, bidding him abandon a hope that 
was vain and set himself to forget a most un- 
happy lady. 

‘ ‘ Robert shall not have her,” said Antonio, 
putting the letter in his belt. 

“ Then the time is short,” said Tommasino. 

They were walking together on the terrace 
before Antonio’s house, whence they looked on 
6 


COUNT ANTONIO IN THE HILLS 


the city across the river. Antonio cast his eye 
on the river and on the wall of the Duke’s 
garden that ran along it; fair trees, shrubs, and 
flowers lined the top of the wall, and the water 
gleamed in the sunshine. 

“ It is strange,” said Antonio, musing, “ that 
one maiden can darken for a man all the world 
that God lights with his sun. Yet since so it 
is, Tommasino, a man can be but a man ; and 
being a man, he is a poor man, if he stand by 
while another takes his love.” 

“ And that other a stranger, and, as I swear, 
a cut-throat,” added Tommasino. 

When they had dined and evening began to 
come on, Antonio made his servants saddle the 
best horses in his stable — though, indeed, the 
choice was small, for Antonio was not rich as 
a man of his rank counts riches — and the two 
rode down the hill towards the city. But, as 
they went, Antonio turned once and again in 
his saddle and gazed long at the old gray 
house, the round tower, and the narrow gate. 

“ Why look behind, and not forward ? ” asked 
Tommasino. 

“ Because there is a foreboding in me,” an- 
swered Antonio, “ that it will be long before 
I pass again through that gate. W ere there a 
hope of persuading you, Tommasino, I would 
7 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


bid you turn back, and leave me to go alone 
on this errand.” 

“ Keep your breath against when you have 
to run,” laughed Tommasino, pricking his horse 
and tossing his hair, dark as Antonio s was fair, 
back from his neck. 

Across the bridge they rode and through the 
gates, and having traversed the great square, 
came to the door of Lucia s house, where it 
rose fronting the Dukes palace. Here An- 
tonio dismounted, giving his bridle into Tom- 
masino’s hand, and bade the servants carry his 
name to the Lady Lucia. A stir arose among 
them and much whispering, till an old man, 
head of the serving-men, came forward, saying : 
“ Pardon, my lord, but we are commanded not 
to admit you to the Lady Lucia ; ” and he 
waved his hand towards the inner part of the 
porch, where Antonio saw a dozen or more 
pikemen of the Duke’s Guard drawn across 
the passage to the house ; and their pikes 
flashed in the rays of the setting sun as they 
levelled them in front of their rank. 

Some of the townsmen and apprentice lads, 
stout fellows, each with a staff, had gathered 
now round Antonio, whom they loved for his 
feats of strength and his liberal gifts to the 
poor, and, understanding what was afoot, one 
8 


COUNT ANTONIO IN THE HILLS 


came to him, saying: “There are some, my 
lord, who would enter with you if you are set 
on entering,” and the fellow’s eyes sparkled; 
for there was a great enmity in the town 
against the pikemen, and a lusty youth with a 
stick in his hand is never loth to find a use 
for it. 

For a moment Count Antonio hesitated; for 
they flocked closer to him, and Tommasino 
threw him a glance of appeal and touched the 
hilt of his sword. But he would not that the 
blood of men who were themselves loved by 
mothers, wives, and maids, should be shed in 
his quarrel, and he raised his hand, bidding 
them be still. 

“ I have no quarrel with the pikemen,” said 
he, “ and we must not fight against His High- 
ness’s servants.” 

The faces of the townsmen grew long in dis- 
appointment. Tommasino alone laughed low, 
recognising in Antonio’s gentleness the lull 
that heralds a storm. The Count was never 
more dangerous than when he praised submis- 
sion. 

“But,” continued Antonio, “I would fain 
see the Lady Lucia.” And with this he stepped 
inside the porch, signing to Tommasino to 
stay where he was ; but the lad would not, and, 
9 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


leaping down, ran to his kinsman and stood 
shoulder to shoulder with him. 

Thus they stood facing the line of pikemen, 
when suddenly the opposing rank opened and 
Robert de Beauregard himself came through. 
Starting slightly on sight of Antonio, he yet 
bowed courteously, baring his head, and An- 
tonio, with Tommasino, did the like. 

“ What is your desire, my lord ? ” asked 
Robert. 

“ I have naught to ask of you,” answered 
Antonio, and he took a step forward. Robert’s 
hand flew to his sword, and in a moment they 
would have fought. But now another figure 
came forward with uplifted hand. It was the 
Duke himself, and he looked on Antonio with 
his dark smile, and Antonio flushed red. 

“ You seek me, Antonio ? ” asked the Duke. 

“ I seek not your Highness, but my plighted 
wife,” said Antonio. 

Duke Valentine smiled still. Coming to 
Antonio, he passed his arm through his, and 
said in most friendly fashion : “ Come with me 
to my house, and we will talk of this ; ” and 
Antonio, caught fast in the choice between 
obedience and open revolt, went frowning 
across the square, the Duke’s arm through his, 
Robert on the Duke’s other side, and, behind, 
10 


COUNT ANTONIO IN THE HILLS 


Tommasino with the horses. But as they 
went, a sudden cry came from the house they 
left, and a girl’s face showed for an instant, 
tear-stained and pallid, at an open window. A 
shiver ran through Antonio ; but the Duke 
pressing his arm, he went still in silence. 

At the door of the palace, a lackey took the 
horses from Tommasino, and the four passed 
through the great hall and through the Duke’s 
cabinet beyond and into the garden ; there the 
Duke sat down under the wall of the garden, 
near by the fish-pond, and, turning suddenly 
on Antonio, spoke to him fiercely; “ Men have 
died at my hands for less,” said he. 

“ Then for each of such shall you answer to 
God,” retorted Antonio, not less hotly. 

“ You scout my commands in the face of all 
the city,” said the Duke in low stern tones. 
“ Now, by Heaven, if you seek to see the girl 
again, I will hang you from the tower of the 
gate. So be warned — now — once : there shall 
be no second warning.” 

He ceased, and sat with angry eyes on An 
tonio ; and Robert, who stood by his master, 
glared as fierce. But Antonio was silent for a 
while and rested his arm on Tommasino’s 
shoulder. 

“ My fathers have served and fought for 
11 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


your fathers,” said he at last. “ What has this 
gentleman done for the Duchy ? ” 

Then Robert spoke suddenly and scornfully : 
“ This he is ready to do, to punish an insolent 
knave that braves His Highness’s will.” 

Antonio seemed not to hear him, for he did 
not move, but stood with eyes bent on the 
Duke’s face, looking whether his appeal should 
reach its mark. But Tommasino heard ; yet 
never a word spoke Tommasino either, but he 
drew off the heavy riding-glove from his left 
hand, and it hung dangling in the fingers of his 
right, and he looked at the glove and at Robert 
and at the glove again. 

“ I would his Highness were not here,” said 
Tommasino to Robert with a smile. 

“ Hold your peace, boy,” said Robert, “ or 
the Duke will have you whipped. ” 

Youth loves not to be taunted with its 
blessed state. “ I have no more to say,” cried 
Tommasino ; and without more, caring naught 
now for the presence of the Duke, he flung his 
heavy glove full in Robert’s face, and, starting 
back a pace, drew his sword. Then Antonio 
knew that the die was cast, for Tommasino 
would gain no mercy, having insulted the 
Duke’s favourite and drawn his sword in the 
Duke’s palace ; and he also drew out his sword, 
12 


COUNT ANTONIO IN THE HILLS 


and the pair stood facing the Duke and Robert 
de Beauregard. It was but for an instant that 
they stood thus; then Robert, who did not 
lack courage to resent a blow, unsheathed and 
rushed at the boy. Antonio left his cousin to 
defend himself, and, bowing low to the Duke, 
set his sword at the Duke’s breast, before the 
Duke could so much as rise from his seat. 

“I would not touch your Highness,” said 
he, “but these gentlemen must not be inter- 
rupted.” 

“You take me at a disadvantage,” cried the 
Duke. 

“If you will swear not to summon your 
guard, I will sheath my sword, my lord ; or, if 
you will honour me by crossing yours on mine, 
you shall draw yours. ’ ’ 

The place where they sat was hidden from 
the palace windows, yet the Duke trusted that 
the sound of the clashing steel would bring 
aid ; therefore, not desiring to fight with An- 
tonio (for Duke Valentine loved to scheme 
rather than to strike), he sat stiU, answering 
nothing. And now Tommasino and Robert 
were engaged, Robert attacking furiously and 
Tommasino parrying him as coolly as though 
they fenced for pastime in the school. It was 
Tommasino’s fault to think of naught but the 
3 13 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


moment; and he did not remember that every 
second might bring the guard upon them. 
And Antonio would not call it to his mind, 
but he said to the Duke : “ The boy will kiU 
him, sir. He is a finer swordsman than I, and 
marvellously active.” 

Then the Duke, having been pondering on 
his course, and knowing Antonio — sitting there 
with the Count’s sword against his breast — did 
by calculation what many a man braver in fight 
had not dared to do. There was in truth a 
courage in it, for all that it was born of shrewd- 
ness. For, thus with the sword on his heart, 
fixing a calm glance on Antonio, he cried as 
loudly as he could, ‘‘ Help, help, treason ! ” 

Antonio drew back his arm for the stroke; 
and the Duke sat still; then, swift as thought, 
Antonio laughed, bowed to Duke Valentine 
and, turning, rushed between the fighters, 
striking up their swords. In amazement, they 
stood for a moment : Antonio drove his sword 
into its sheath, and, while Robert was yet as- 
tounded, he rushed on him, caught him by 
the waist, and, putting forth his strength, 
flung him clear and far into the fish-pond. 
Then seizing Tommasino by the arm he 
started with him at a run for the great hall. 
The Duke rose, crying loudly, “ Treason, trea- 
ts 


COUNT ANTONIO IN THE HILLS 


son ! ” But Antonio cried “ Treason, trea- 
son,” yet louder than the Duke; and presently 
Tommasino, who had frowned at his pastime 
being interrupted, fell a-laughing, and between 
the laughs cried “ Treason, treason ! ” with 
Antonio. And at the entrance of the hall 
they met a dozen pikemen running; and An- 
tonio, pointing over his shoulder, called in 
tones of horror, “ Treason, treason I ” And 
Tommasino cried, “The Duke! Help the 
Duke 1 ” So that they passed untouched 
through the pikemen, who hesitated an in- 
stant in bewilderment but then swept on ; for 
they heard the Duke’s own voice crying still 
‘‘ Treason, treason 1 ” And through the haU 
and out to the portico passed the cousins, 
echoing their cries of “ Treason ! ” And 
every man they met went whither they 
pointed ; and when they leapt on their horses, 
the very lackey that had held them dropped 
the bridles with hasty speed and ran into the 
palace, crying “Treason!” Then Antonio, 
Tommasino ever following, and both yet cry- 
ing “ Treason ! ’ ’ dashed across the square ; 
and on the way they met the pikemen who 
guarded the Lady Lucia, and the townsmen 
who were mocking and snarling at the pike- 
men ; and to pikemen and townsmen alike 
15 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


they cried (though Tommasino hardly could 
speak now for laughter and lack of breath), 
“ Treason, treason ! ’ ’ And all to whom they 
cried flocked to the palace, crying in their 
turn “ Treason, treason ! ” so that people ran 
out of every house in the neighbourhood and 
hurried to the palace, crying, “ Treason ! ’ ’ 
and everyone asking his neighbour what the 
treason was. And thus, by the time in which 
a man might count a hundred, a crowd was 
pushing and pressing and striving round the 
gate of the palace, and the cousins were alone 
on the other side of the great square. 

‘‘Now thanks be to God for that idea!” 
gasped Tommasino. 

But Antonio gave not thanks till his meal 
was ended. Raising his voice as he halted his 
horse before the Lady Lucia’s house, he called 
loudly, no longer “ Treason ! ” but “ Lucia I ” 
And she, knowing his voice, looked out again 
from the window; but some hand plucked her 
away as soon as she had but looked. Then 
Antonio leapt from his horse with an oath and 
ran to the door, and finding it unguarded, he 
rushed in, leaving Tommasino seated on one 
horse and holding the other, with one eye on 
Lucia’s house and the other on the palace, 
praying that, by the favour of Heaven, Anto- 
16 


COUNT ANTONIO IN THE HILLS 


nio might come out again before the crowd 
round the Duke’s gates discovered why it was, 
to a man, crying “ Treason ! ” 

But in the palace of the Duke there was 
great confusion. For the pikemen, finding 
Robert de Beauregard scrambling out of the 
fish-pond with a drawn sword in his hand and 
His Highness crying “ Treason ! ” with the 
best of them, must have it that the traitor was 
none other than Robert himself, and in their 
dutiful zeal they came nigh to making an end 
of him then and there, before the Duke could 
gain silence enough to render his account of 
the affair audible. And when the first pike- 
men were informed, there came others ; and 
these others, finding the first thronging round 
the Duke and Robert, cried out on them for 
the traitors, and were on the point of engag- 
ing them ; and when they also had been with 
difficulty convinced, and the two parties, with 
His Highness and Robert, turned to the pur- 
suit of the cousins, they found the whole of 
the great hall utterly blocked by a concourse 
of the townsmen, delighted beyond measure at 
the chance of an affray with the hated pike- 
men, who, they conceived, must beyond doubt 
be the wicked traitors that had risen in arms 
against the Duke’s life and throne. Narrowly 
17 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


indeed was a great battle in the hall averted 
by the Duke himself, who leapt upon a high 
seat and spoke long and earnestly to the peo- 
ple, persuading them that not the pikemen, 
but Antonio and Tommasino, were the trai- 
tors ; which the townsmen found hard to be- 
lieve, in part because they wished not to be- 
lieve ill of Antonio, and more inasmuch as 
every man there knew — and the women and 
children also — that Antonio and Tommasino, 
and none else of all the city had raised the 
alarm. But some hearkened at last ; and with 
these and a solid wedge of the pikemen, the 
Duke and Robert, with much ado, thrust 
their way through the crowd and won access 
to the door of the palace. 

In what time a thousand men may be con- 
vinced, you may hope to turn one woman s 
mind, and at the instant that the Duke gained 
the square with his friends and his guards, 
Count Antonio had prevailed on the Lady 
Lucia to brave His Highness’s wrath. It is 
true that he had met with some resistance 
from the steward, who was in Robert’s pay, 
and had tarried to buffet the fellow into obedi- 
ence ; and with more from an old governess, 
who, since she could not be buffeted, had per- 
force to be locked in a cupboard ; yet the 
18 


COUNT ANTONIO IN THE HILLS 


better part of the time had to be spent in 
imploring Lucia herself. At last, with many 
fears and some tears, she had yielded, and it 
was with glad eyes that Tommasino saw the 
Count come forth from the door carrying 
Lucia on his arm ; and others saw him also ; 
for a great shout came from the Duke’s party 
across the square, and the pikemen set out at 
a run with Robert himself at their head. Yet 
so soon as they were started, Antonio also, 
bearing Lucia in his arms, had reached w^here 
Tommasino was with the horses, and an 
instant later he was mounted and cried, ‘‘ To 
the gate ! ” and he struck in his spurs, and 
his horse bounded forward, Tommasino fol- 
lowing. No more than a hundred yards lay 
between them and the gate of the city, and 
before the pikemen could bar their path they 
had reached the gate. The gate- wardens were 
in the act of shutting it, having perceived the 
tumult ; but Tommasino struck at them with 
the flat of his sword, and they gave way before 
the rushing horses ; and before the great gate 
was shut, Antonio and he were on their way 
through, and the hoofs of their horses clattered 
over the bridge. Thus Antonio was clear of 
the city with his lady in his arms and Tomma- 
sino his cousin safe by his side. 

19 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


Yet they were not safe ; for neither Duke 
Valentine nor Robert de Beauregard was a 
man who sat down under defeat. But few 
moments had passed before there issued from 
the gate a company of ten mounted and 
armed men, and Robert, riding in their front, 
saw, hard on a mile away, the cousins heading 
across the plain towards the spot where the 
spurs of Mount Agnino run down ; for there 
was the way of safety. But it was yet ten 
miles away. And Robert and his company 
galloped furiously in pursuit, while Duke Val- 
entine watched from the wall of the garden 
above the river. 

Now Count Antonio was a big man and 
heavy, so that his horse was weighed down by 
the twofold burden on its back ; and looking 
behind him, he perceived that Robert’s com- 
pany drew nearer and yet nearer. And Tom- 
masino, looking also, said, “ I doubt they are 
too many for us, for you have the lady in your 
arms. We shall not get clear of the hills.” 

Then Antonio drew in his horse a little and, 
letting the bridle fall, took the Lady Lucia in 
both his arms and kissed her, and having thus 
done, lifted her and set her on Tommasino’s 
horse. “ Thank God,” said he, “ that you are 
no heavier than a feather.” 

20 


COUNT ANTONIO IN THE HILLS 


“Yet two feathers may be too much,” said 
Tommasino. 

“ Ride on,” said Antonio. “ I will check 
them for a time, so that you shaU come safe to 
the outset of the hill.” 

Tommasino obeyed him ; and Antonio, rid- 
ing more softly now, placed himself between 
Tommasino and the pursuers. Tommasino 
rode on with the swooning lady in his arms ; 
but his face was grave and troubled, for, as he 
said, two feathers may be overmuch, and Rob- 
ert’s company rode well and swiftly. 

“ If Antonio can stop them, it is well,” said 
he ; “ but if not, I shall not reach the hills ; ” 
and he looked with no great love on the un- 
happy lady, for it seemed like enough that 
Antonio would be slain for her sake, and Tom- 
masino prized him above a thousand damsels. 
Yet he rode on, obedient. 

But Antonio’s scheme had not passed unde- 
tected by Robert de Beauregard ; and Robert, 
being a man of guile and cunning, swore aloud 
an oath that, though he died himself, yet Tom- 
masino should not carry off Lucia. Therefore 
he charged his men one and all to ride after 
Tommasino and bring back Lucia, leaving him 
alone to contend with Antonio 5 and they were 
not loth to obey, for it was little to their taste 
21 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


or wish to surround Antonio and kill him. 
Thus, when the company came within fifty 
yards of Antonio, the ranks suddenly parted ; 
five diverged to the right, and four to the left, 
passing Antonio in sweeping curves, so far off 
that he could not reach them, while Robert 
alone rode straight at him. Antonio, per- 
ceiving the stratagem, would fain have ridden 
again after Tommasino ; but Robert was hard 
upon him, and he was in peril of being thrust 
through the back as he fled. So he turned and 
faced his enemy. But although Robert had 
sworn so boldly before his men, his mind was 
not what he had declared to them, and he de- 
sired to meet Antonio alone, not that he might 
fight a fair fight with him, but in order treach- 
erously to deceive him — a thing he was ashamed 
to do before his comrades. Coming up then 
to Antonio, he reined in his horse, crying, 
“ My lord, I bring peace from His Highness.” 

Antonio wondered to hear him ; yet, when 
Robert, his sword lying untouched in its 
sheath, sprang from his horse and approached 
him, he dismounted also ; and Robert said to 
him : “ I have charged them to injure neither 
the Lady Lucia nor your cousin by so much as 
a hair ; for the Duke bids me say that he will 
not constrain the lady. ” 

22 


COUNT ANTONIO IN THE HILLS 


“ Is she then given to me ? ” cried Antonio, 
his face lighting up with a marvellous eagerness. 

“ Nay, not so fast,” answered Robert with 
subtle cunning. “ The Duke will not give her 
to you now. But he will exact from you and 
from me alike an oath not to molest, no, not 
to see her, for three months, and then she shall 
choose as she will between us.” 

While he spoke this fair speech, he had been 
drawing nearer to Antonio ; and Antonio, not 
yet convinced of his honesty, drew back a 
pace. Then Robert let go of his horse, un- 
buckled his sword, flung it on the ground, and 
came to Antonio with outstretched hands. 
“Behold!” said he; “I am in your mercy, 
my lord. If you do not believe me, slay me.” 

Antonio looked at him with searching, wist- 
ful eyes ; he hated to war against the Duke, 
and his heart was aflame with the hope that 
dwelt for him in Robert’s words; for he did 
not doubt but that neither three months, nor 
three years, nor three hundred years, could 
change his lady’s love. 

“You speak fair, sir,” said he ; “but what 
warrant have I ? ” 

“ And, save your honour, what warrant have 
I, who stand here unarmed before you ? ” asked 
Robert. 


23 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


For a while Antonio pondered ; then he said 
“ My lord, I must crave your pardon for my 
doubt ; but the matter is so great that to your 
word I dare not trust ; but if you will ride 
back with your men and pray the Duke to 
send me a promise under his own hand, to that 
I will trust. And meanwhile Tommasino, with 
the Lady Lucia, shall abide in a safe place, and 
I will stay here, awaiting your return ; and, if 
you will, let two of your men stay with me.” 

“ Many a man, my lord,” returned Robert, 
“ would take your caution in bad part. But let 
it be so. Come, we will ride after my com- 
pany.” And he rose and caught Antonio’s 
horse by the bridle and brought it to him; 
“ Mount, my lord,” said he, standing by. 

Antonio, believing either that the man was 
true or that his treachery — if treachery there 
were in him — was foiled, and seeing him to all 
seeming unarmed, save for a little dagger in 
his belt which would hardly suffice to kill a 
man and was more a thing of ornament than 
use, set his foot in the stirrup and prepared to 
mount. And in so doing he turned his back 
on Robert de Beauregard. The moment for 
which that wicked man had schemed and lied 
was come. Still holding Antonio’s stirrup with 
one hand, he drew, swift as hghtning, from 
24 


COUNT ANTONIO IN THE HILLS 


under his cloak, a dagger different far from the 
toy in his belt — short, strong, broad, and keen. 
And that moment had been Antonio’s last, had 
it not chanced that, on the instant Robert drew 
the dagger, the horse started a pace aside, and 
Antonio, taken unawares, stumbled forward 
and came near falling on the ground. His sal- 
vation lay in that stumble, for Robert, having 
put all his strength into the blow, and then 
striking not Antonio but empty air, in his turn 
staggered forward, and could not recover him- 
self before Antonio turned round, a smile at 
his own unwariness on his lips. 

Then he saw the broad keen knife in the 
hand of Robert. Robert breathed quickly, 
and glared at him, but did not rush on him. 
He stood glaring, the knife in his hands, his 
parted lips displaying grinning teeth. Not a 
word spoke Antonio, but he drew his sword, 
and pointed where Robert’s sword lay on the 
grass. The traitor, recognising the grace that 
allowed him to take his sword, shamed, it may 
be, by such return for his own treachery, in 
silence lifted and drew it ; and, withdrawing to 
a distance from the horses, which quietly 
cropped the grass, the two faced one another. 

Calm and easy were the bearing and the air 
of Count Antonio, if the pictures of him that 

25 


CHKONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


live drawn in the words of those who knew 
him be truthful; calm and easy ever was he, 
save when he fought; but then it seemed as 
though there came upon him a sort of fury 
akin to madness, or (as the ancients would 
have fabled) to some inspiration from the God 
of War, which transformed him utterly, imbu- 
ing him with a rage and rushing impetuosity. 
Here lay his danger when matched with such 
a swordsman as was little Tommasino ; but for 
all that, few cared to meet him, some saying 
that, though they called themselves as brave as 
others, yet they seemed half appalled when 
Count Antonio set upon them ; for he fought 
as though he must surely win and as though 
God were with him. Thus now he darted upon 
Robert de Beauregard, in seeming recklessness 
of receiving thrusts himself, yet ever escaping 
them by his sudden resource and dexterity 
and ever himself attacking, leaving no space to 
take breath, and bewildering the other’s prac- 
tised skill by the dash and brilliance of his 
assault. And it may be also that the dark- 
ness, which was now falling fast, hindered 
Robert the more, for Antonio was famed for 
the keenness of his eyes by night. Be these 
things as they may, in the very moment when 
Robert pricked Antonio in the left arm and 


COUNT ANTONIO IN THE HILLS 


cried out in triumph on his stroke, Antonio 
leapt on him and drove his sword through his 
heart ; and Robert, with the sword yet in him, 
fell to the ground, groaning. And when An- 
tonio drew forth the sword, the man at his feet 
died. Thus, if it be God’s will, may all trai- 
tors perish. 

Antonio looked round the plain ; but it grew 
darker still, and even his sight did not avail 
for more than some threescore yards. Yet he 
saw a dark mass on his right, distant, as he 
judged, that space or more. Rapidly it moved : 
surely it was a group of men galloping, and 
Antonio stood motionless regarding them. 
But they swept on, not turning whither he 
stood ; and he, unable to tell what they did, 
whether they sought him or whither they 
went, watched them till they faded away in 
the darkness ; and then, leaving Robert where 
he lay, he mounted his horse and made speed 
towards the hills, praying that there he should 
find his cousin and the Lady Lucia, escaped 
from the pursuit of the Duke’s men. Yet had 
he known what those dimly discerned riders 
bore with them, he would have been greatly 
moved at all costs and at every hazard to fol- 
low after them and seek to overtake them 
before they came to the city. 

27 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


On he rode towards the hills, quickly, yet 
not so hastily but that he scanned the ground 
as he went so well as the night allowed him. 
The moon was risen now and to see was easier. 
When he had covered a distance of some two 
miles, he perceived something lying across his 
path. Bending to look, he found it to be the 
corpse of a horse: he leapt down and bent 
over it. It was the horse Tommasino had 
ridden : it was hamstrung, and its throat had 
been cut. Antonio, seeing it, in sudden ap- 
prehension of calamity, cried aloud ; and to 
his wonder his cry was answered by a voice 
which came from a clump of bushes fifty yards 
on the right. He ran hastily to the spot, 
thinking nothing of his own safety nor of 
anything else than what had befallen his 
friends ; and under the shelter of the bushes 
two men of the Duke’s Guard, their horses 
tethered near them, squatted on the ground, 
and, between, Tommasino lay full length on 
the ground. His face was white, his eyes 
closed, and a bloody bandage was about his 
head. One of the two by him had forced 
his lips open and was giving him to drink 
from a bottle. The other sprang up on sight 
of Antonio and laid a hand to his sword- 
hilt. 


28 


COUNT ANTONIO IN THE HILLS 


“ Peace, peace ! ” said Antonio. “ Is the 
lad dead ? ” 

“ He is not dead, my lord, but he is sore 
hurt.” 

“ And what do you here with him ? And 
how did you take him ? ” 

“We came up with him here, and sur- 
rounded him ; and while some of us held him 
in front, one cut the hamstrings of his horse 
from behind ; and the horse fell, and with the 
horse the lady and the young lord. He was 
up in an instant ; but as he rose, the lieutenant 
struck him on the head and dealt him the 
wound you see. Then he could fight no more ; 
and the lieutenant took the lady, and with the 
rest rode back towards the city, leaving us 
charged with the duty of bringing the young 
lord in so soon as he was in a state to come 
with us.” 

“ They took the lady ? ” 

“ Even so, my lord.” 

“ And why did they not seek for me ? ” 

The fellow — Martolo was his name — smiled 
grimly; and his comrade, looking up, an- 
swered : “ Maybe they did not wish to find 
you, my lord. They had been eight to one, 
and could not have failed to take you in the 
end.” 


3 


29 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


“ Ay, in the end,” said Martolo, laughing 
now. “Nor,” added he, “had the heutenant 
such great love for Robert de Beauregard that 
he would rejoice to deliver you to death for 
his sake, seeing that you are a Monte Velluto 
and he a rascally ” 

“ Peace ! He is dead,” said Count Antonio. 

“You have killed him?” they cried with 
one voice. 

“ He attacked me in treachery, and I have 
killed him,” answered Antonio. 

For a while there was silence. Then An- 
tonio asked, “ The lady — did she go will- 
ingly ? ” 

“ She was frightened and dazed by her fall, 
my lord ; she knew not what she did nor what 
they did to her. And the lieutenant took her 
in front of him, and, holding her with all gen- 
tleness, so rode towards the city.” 

“ God keep her,” said Antonio. 

“ Amen, poor lady ! ” said Martolo, doffing 
his cap. 

Then Antonio whistled to his horse, which 
came to his side ; with a gesture he bade the 
men stand aside, and they obeyed him ; and 
he gathered Tommasino in his arms. Hold 
my stirrup, that I may mount, ” said he ; and 
still they obeyed. But when they saw him 
30 


COUNT ANTONIO IN THE HILLS 


mounted, with Tommasino seated in front of 
him, Martolo cried, “ But, my lord, we are 
charged to take him back and deliver him to 
the Duke.” 

“ And if you do ? ” asked Antonio. 

Martolo made a movement as of one tying a 
noose. 

“ And if you do not ? ” asked Antonio. 

“ Then we had best not show ourselves alive 
to the Duke.” 

Antonio looked down on them. “ To whom 
bear you allegiance ? ” said he. 

“To His Highness the Duke,” they an- 
swered, uncovering as they spoke. 

“ And to whom besides ? ” asked Antonio. 

“ To none besides,” they answered, wonder- 
ing. 

“ Ay, but you do,” said he. “ To One who 
wills not that you should deliver to death a 
lad who has done but what his honour bade 
him.” 

“ God’s counsel God knows,” said Martolo. 
“We are dead men if we return alone to the 
city. You had best slay us yourself, my lord, 
if we may not carry the young lord with us.” 

“You are honest lads, are you not?” he 
asked. “ By your faces, you are men of the 
city.” 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


“ So are we, my lord ; but we serve the 
Duke in his Guard for reward.” 

‘‘ I love the men of the city as they love 
me,” said Antonio. “ And a few pence a day 
should not buy a man’s soul as well as his 
body.” 

The two men looked at one another in per- 
plexity. The fear and deference in which they 
held Antonio forbade them to fall on him; 
yet they dared not let him take Tommasino. 
Then, as they stood doubting, he spoke low 
and softly to them: “When he that should 
give law and uphold right deals wrong, and 
makes white black and black white, it is for 
gentlemen and honest men to be a law unto 
themselves. Mount your horses, then, and 
follow me. And so long as I am safe, you 
shall be safe ; and so long as I live, you shall 
live ; and while I eat and drink, you shall have 
to drink and eat ; and you shall be my ser- 
vants. And when the time of God’s will — 
whereof God forbid that I should doubt — is 
come, I will go back to her I love, and you 
shall go back to them that love you ; and men 
shall say that you have proved yourselves true 
men and good. ” 

Thus it was that two men of the Duke’s 
Guard — Martolo and he whom they called 
32 


COUNT ANTONIO IN THE HILLS 


Bena (for of his true name there is no record) 
— went together with Count Antonio and his 
cousin Tommasino to a secret fastness in the 
hills ; and there in the course of many days 
Tommasino was healed of the wound which 
the Lieutenant of the Guard had given him, 
and rode his horse again, and held next place 
to Antonio himself in the band that gathered 
round them. For there came to them every 
man that was wrongfully oppressed ; and 
some came for love of adventure and because 
they hoped to strike good blows; and some 
came whom Antonio would not receive, inas- 
much as they were greater rogues than were 
those whose wrath they fled from. 

Such is the tale of how Count Antonio was 
outlawed from the Duke’s peace and took to 
the hills. Faithfully have I set it down, and 
whoso will may blame the Count, and whoso 
will may praise him. For myself, I thank 
Heaven that I am well rid of this same trou- 
blesome passion of love, that likens one man 
to a lion and another to a fox. 

But the Lady Lucia, being brought back to 
the city by the Lieutenant of the Guard, was 
lodged in her own house, and the charge of 
her was commended by the Duke into the 
hands of a discreet lady ; and for a while His 
33 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


Highness, for very shame, forbore to trouble 
her with suitors. For he said, in his bitter 
humour, as he looked down on the dead body 
of Robert de Beauregard : “ I have lost two 
good servants and four strong arms through 
her ; and mayhap, if I find her another suitor, 
she will rob me of yet another stalwart gentle- 
man.” 

So she abode, in peace indeed, but in sore 
desolation and sorrow, longing for the day 
when Count Antonio should come back to seek 
her. And again was she closely guarded by 
the Duke. 


34 


CHAPTER II 


COUNT ANTONIO AND THE TRAITOR PRINCE 

Of all the deeds that Count Antonio of Monte 
Velluto did during the time that he was an 
outlaw in the hills (for a price had been set on 
his head by Duke Valentine), there was none 
that made greater stir or struck more home to 
the hearts of men, howsoever they chose to 
look upon it, than that which he performed on 
the high hill that faces the wicket gate on the 
west side of the city and is called now the Hill 
of Duke Paul. Indeed it was the act of a man 
whose own conscience was his sole guide, and 
who made the law which his own hand was to 
carry out. That it had been a crime in most 
men, who can doubt ? That it was a crime in 
him, all governments must hold ; and the same, 
I take it, must be the teaching of the Church. 
Yet not all men held it a crime, although they 
had not ventured it themselves, both from the 
greatness of the person whom the deed con- 
cerned, and also for the burden that it put on 
the conscience of him that did it. Here, 
then, is the story of it, as it is still told both 
85 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


in the houses of the noble and in peasants’ 
cottages. 

While Count Antonio still dwelt at the 
Court, and had not yet fled from the wrath 
aroused in the Duke by the Count’s attempt to 
carry off the Lady Lucia, the Duke’s ward, the 
nuptials of His Highness had been celebrated 
with great magnificence and universal rejoic- 
ing ; and the feasting and exultation had been 
most happily renewed on the birth of an infant 
Prince, a year later. Yet heavy was the price 
paid for this gift of Heaven, for Her Highness 
the Duchess, a lady of rare grace and kindli- 
ness, survived the birth of her son only three 
months, and then died, amidst the passionate 
mourning of the people, leaving the Duke a 
prey to bitter sorrow. Many say that she had 
turned his heart to good had she but lived, and 
that it was the loss of her that soured him and 
twisted his nature. If it be so, I pray that he 
has received pardon for aU his sins ; for his grief 
was great, and hardly to be assuaged even by 
the love he had for the little Prince, from whom 
he would never be parted for an hour, if he 
could contrive to have the boy with him, and 
in whom he saw, with pride, the heir of his 
throne. 

Both in the joy of the wedding and the grief 
36 


ANTONIO AND THE PRINCE 

at the Duchess’s death none had made more 
ostentatious sign of sharing than His High- 
ness’s brother, Duke Paul. Yet hollow alike 
were his joy and his grief, save that he found 
true cause for sorrow in that the Duchess left 
to her husband a dear memorial of their brief 
union. Paul rivalled the Duke in his caresses 
and his affected love for the boy, but he had 
lived long in the hope that His Highness would 
not marry, and that he himself should succeed 
him in his place, and this hope he could not put 
out of his heart. Nay, as time passed and the 
baby grew to a healthy boy, Paul’s thoughts 
took a still deeper hue of guilt. It was no 
longer enough for him to hope for his nephew’s 
death, or even to meditate how he should bring 
it about. One wicked imagining led on, as it 
is wont in our sinful nature, to another, and 
Satan whispered in Paul’s ear that the Duke 
himself was short of forty by a year, that to 
wait for power till youth were gone was not 
a bold man’s part, and that to contrive the 
child’s death, leaving his father alive, was but 
to double the risk without halving the guilt. 
Thus was Paul induced to dwell on the death 
of both father and son, and to say to himself 
that if the father went first the son would 
easily follow, and that with one cunning and 
37 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


courageous stroke the path to the throne might 
be cleared. 

While Paul pondered on these designs, 
there came about the events which drove 
Count Antonio from the Court ; and no 
sooner was he gone and declared in open dis- 
obedience and contumacy against the Duke, 
than Paul, seeking a handle for his plans, 
seemed to find one in Antonio. Here was a 
man driven from his house (which the Duke 
had burnt), despoiled of his revenues, bereft of 
his love, proclaimed a free mark for whosoever 
would serve the Duke by slaying him. Where 
could be a better man for the purposes of a 
malcontent prince ? And the more was Paul 
inclined to use Antonio from the fact that he 
had shown favour to Antonio, and been wont 
to seek his society ; so that Antonio, faihng to 
pierce the dark depths of his heart, was loyally 
devoted to him, and had returned an answer 
full of gratitude and friendship to the secret 
messages in which Paul had sent him condo- 
lence on the mishap that had befallen him. 

Now in the beginning of the second year of 
Count Antonio’s outlawry. His Highness was 
most mightily incensed against him, not merely 
because he had so won the affection of the 
country-folk that none would betray his hid- 
88 


ANTONIO AND THE PRINCE 


ing-place either for threats or for reward, but 
most chiefly by reason of a certain act which 
was in truth more of Tommasino’s doing than 
of Antonio’s. For Tommasino, meeting one 
of the Duke’s farmers of taxes, had lightened 
him of his fat bag of money, saying that he 
would himself assume the honour of delivering 
what was fairly due to His Highness, and had 
upon that scattered three-fourths of the spoil 
among the poor, and sent the beggarly remnant 
privily by night to the gate of the city, with a 
writing, “There is honour among thieves; 
who, then, may call Princes thieves ? ” And 
this writing had been read by many, and the 
report of it, spreading through the city, had 
made men laugh. Therefore the Duke had 
sworn that by no means should Antonio gain 
pardon save by delivering that insolent young 
robber to the hands of justice. Thus he was 
highly pleased when his brother sought him in 
the garden (for he sat in his wonted place 
under the wall by the fish-pond) and bade him 
listen to a plan whereby the outlaws should be 
brought to punishment. The Duke took his 
little son upon his knees, and prayed his 
brother to tell his device. 

“You could not bring me a sweeter gift 
than the head of Tommasino,” said he, strok- 
39 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


ing the child’s curls ; and the child shrank 
closer into his arms, for the child did not love 
Paul but feared him. 

“Antonio knows that I love Your High- 
ness,” said Paul, seating himself on the seat 
by the Duke, “ but he knows also that I am 
his friend, and a friend to the Lady Lucia, and 
a man of tender heart. Would it seem to him 
deep treachery if I should go privately to him 
and tell him how that on a certain day you 
would go forth with your guard to camp in 
the spurs of Mount Agnino, leaving the city 
desolate, and that on the night of that day I 
could contrive that Lucia should come secretly 
to the gate, and that it should be opened for 
her, so that by a sudden descent she might be 
seized and carried safe to his hiding-place 
before aid could come from Your Highness ? ” 

“ But what should the truth be ? ” asked 
Valentine. 

“ The truth should be that while part of the 
Guard went to the spurs of the Mount, the 
rest should lie in ambush close inside the city 
gates and dash out on Antonio and his com- 
pany.” 

“ It is well, if he will believe.” 

Then Paul laid his finger on his brother’s 
arm. “As the clock in the tower of the 
40 


ANTONIO AND THE PRINCE 


cathedral strikes three on the morning of the 
1 5th of the month, do you, dear brother, be in 
your summer-house at the corner of the gar- 
den yonder ; and I will come thither and tell 
you if he has believed and if he has come. For 
by then I shall have learnt from him his 
mind : and we two will straightway go rouse 
the guards and lead the men to their appointed 
station, and when he approaches the gate we 
can lay hands on him.” 

“ How can you come to him? For we do 
not know where he is hid.” 

“Alas, there is not a rogue of a peasant 
that cannot take a letter to him ! ” 

“ Yet when I question them, ay, though I 
beat them, they know nothing ! ” cried Valen- 
tine in chagrin. “ Truly, the sooner we lay 
him by the heels, the better for our security.” 

“ Shall it be, then, as I say, my lord ? ” 

‘‘ So let it be,” said the Duke. “ I will 
await you in the summer-house.” 

Paul, perceiving that his brother had no 
suspicions of him and would await him in the 
summer-house, held his task to be already 
half-done. For his plan was that he and An- 
tonio should come together to the summer- 
house, but that Antonio should lie hid till 
Paul had spoken to the Duke ; then Paul 
41 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


should go out on pretext of bidding the guard 
make ready the ambush, and leave the Duke 
alone with Antonio. Antonio then, suddenly 
springing forth, should slay the Duke ; while 
Paul — and when he thought on this, he smiled 
to himself — would so contrive that a body of 
men should bar Antonio’s escape, and straight- 
way kill him. Thus should he be quit both 
of his brother and of Antonio, and no man 
would live who knew how the deed was 
contrived. ‘‘And then,” said he, “I doubt 
whether the poor child, bereft of all parental 
care, will long escape the manifold perils of 
infancy.” 

Thus he schemed ; and when he had made 
all sure, and noised about the Duke’s inten- 
tions touching his going to the spurs of Mount 
Agnino, he himself set forth alone on his horse 
to seek Antonio. He rode till he reached the 
entrance of the pass leading to the recesses of 
the hills. There he dismounted, and sat down 
on the ground ; and this was at noon on the 
13th day of the month. He had not long 
been sitting, when a face peered from behind 
a wall of moss- covered rock that fronted him, 
and Paul cried, “ Is it a friend ? ” 

“A friend of whom mean you, my lord?” 
came from the rock. 


42 


ANTONIO AND THE PRINCE 


“Of whom else than of Count Antonio?” 
cried Paul. 

A silence followed and a delay; then two 
men stole cautiously from behind the rock, 
and in one of them Paul knew the man they 
called Bena, who had been of the Duke’s 
Guard. The men, knowing Paul, bowed low 
to him, and asked him his pleasure, and he 
commanded them to bring him to Antonio. 
They wondered, knowing not whether he 
came from the Duke or despite the Duke; 
but he was urgent in his commands, and at 
length they tied a scarf over his eyes, and set 
him on his horse, and led the horse. Thus 
they went for an hour. Then they prayed 
him to dismount, saying that the horse could 
go no farther; and though Paul’s eyes saw 
nothing, he heard the whinnying and smelt 
the smell of horses. 

“ Here are your stables then, ” said he, and 
dismounted with a laugh. 

Then Bena took him by the hand, and the 
other guided his feet, and climbing up steep 
paths, over boulders and through little water- 
courses, they went, till at length Bena cried, 
“ We are at home, my lord; ” and Paul, tear- 
ing off his bandage, found himself on a small 
level spot, ringed round with stunted wind- 
43 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


beaten firs ; and three huts stood in the mid- 
dle of the space, and before one of the huts 
sat Tommasino, composing a sonnet to a 
pretty peasant girl whom he had chanced to 
meet that day; for Tommasino had ever a 
hospitable heart. But seeing Paul, Tomma- 
sino left his sonnet, and with a cry of wonder 
sprang to meet him; and Paul took him by 
both hands and saluted him. That night and 
the morning that followed, Paul abode with 
Antonio, eating the good cheer and drinking 
the good wine that Tommasino, who had 
charged himself with the care of such matters, 
put before him. Whence they came from, 
Paul asked not; nor did Tommasino say more 
than that they were offerings to Count Anto- 
nio, but whether offerings of free-will or neces- 
sity, he said not. And during this time Paul 
spoke much with Antonio privily and apart, 
persuading him of his friendship, and telling 
most pitiful things of the harshness shown by 
Valentine his brother to the Lady Lucia, and 
how the lady grew pale, and peaked and 
pined, so that the physicians knit their brows 
over her and the women said no drugs would 
patch a broken heart. Thus he inflamed An- 
tonio’s mind with a great rage against the 
Duke, so that he fell to counting the men he 
44 


ANTONIO AND THE PRINCE 


had and wondering whether there were force 
to go openly against the city. But in sorrow 
Paul answered that the pikemen were too 
many. 

‘‘ But there is a way, and a better,’^ said 
Paul, leaning his head near to Antonio’s ear. 

A way whereby you may come to your own 
again, and rebuild your house that the Duke 
has burnt, and enjoy the love of Lucia, and 
hold foremost place in the Duchy.” 

“ What way is that ? ” asked Antonio in 
wondering eagerness. ‘ ‘ Indeed I am willing 
to serve His Highness in any honourable ser- 
vice, if by that I may win his pardon and come 
to that I long for.” 

“His pardon! When did he pardon?” 
sneered Paul. 

To know honest men and leave them to their 
honesty is the last great gift of villainy. But 
Paul had it not; and now he unfolded to An- 
tonio the plan that he had made, saving (as 
needs not to be said) that part of it whereby 
Antonio himself was to meet his death. For 
a pretext he alleged that the Duke oppressed 
the city, and that he, Paul, was put out of 
favour because he had sought to protect the 
people, and was fallen into great suspicion. 
Yet, judging Antonio’s heart by his own, he 
4 45 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


dwelt again and longer on the charms of Lucia, 
and on the great things he would give Antonio 
when he ruled the Duchy for his nephew ; for 
of the last crime he meditated, the death of 
the child, he said naught then, professing to 
love the child. When the tale began, a sudden 
start ran through Antonio, and his face flushed ; 
but he sat still and listened with unmoved 
face, his eyes gravely regarding Paul the while. 
No anger did he show, nor wonder, nor scorn, 
nor now any eagerness; but he gazed at the 
Prince with calm musing glance, as though 
he considered some great question put before 
him. And when Paul ended his tale, Antonio 
sat yet silent and musing. But Paul was 
trembling now, and he stretched out his hand 
and laid it on Antonio’s knee, and asked, with 
a feigned laugh that choked in the utterance, 
“ Well, friend Antonio, is it a clever plan, and 
will you ride with me ? ” 

Minute followed minute before Antonio an- 
swered. At length the frown vanished from 
his brow, and his face grew calm and set, and 
he answered Duke Paul, saying, “ It is such a 
plan as you, my lord, alone of all men in the 
Duchy could make; and I will ride with you.” 

Then Paul, in triumph, caught him by the 
hands and pressed his hands, calling him a man 
46 


ANTONIO AND THE PRINCE 


of fine spirit and a true friend, who should not 
lack reward. And all this Antonio suffered 
silently; and in silence still he listened while 
Paul told him how that a path led privately from 
the bank of the river, through a secret gate in 
the wall, to the summer-house where the Duke 
was to be ; of this gate he alone, saving the 
Duke, had the key; they had but to swim the 
river and enter by this gate. Having hidden 
Antonio, Paul would talk with the Duke; 
then he would go and carry off what remained 
of the guard over and above those that were 
gone to the hills; and Antonio, having done 
his deed, could return by the same secret path, 
cross the river again, and rejoin his friends. 
And in a short space of time Paul would recall 
him with honour to the city and give him 
Lucia to wife. 

“ And if there be a question as to the hand 
that dealt the blow, there is a rascal whom the 
Duke flogged but a few days since, a steward 
in the palace. He deserves hanging, Antonio, 
for a thousand things of which he is guilty, 
and it will trouble me little to hang him for 
one whereof he chances to be innocent.” And 
Duke Paul laughed heartily. 

“ I will ride with you,” said Antonio again. 

Then, it being full mid-day, they sat down 
47 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


to dinner, Paul bandying many merry sayings 
with Tommasino, Antonio being calm but not 
uncheerful. And when the meal was done, 
Paul drank to the good- fortune of their expedi- 
tion; and Antonio having drained his glass, 
said, “May God approve the issue,” and 
straightway bade Tommasino and Martolo 
prepare to ride with him. Then, Paul being 
again blindfolded, they climbed down the 
mountain paths till they came where the 
horses were, and thus, as the sun began to 
decline, set forward at a fair pace, Duke Paul 
and Antonio leading by some few yards ; while 
Tommasino and Martolo, having drunk well, 
and sniffing sport in front of them, sang, jested, 
and played pranks on one another as they 
passed along. But when night fell they be- 
came silent ; even Tommasino turned grave 
and checked his horse, and the space between 
them and the pair who led grew greater, so 
that it seemed to Duke Paul that he and An- 
tonio rode alone through the night, under the 
shadows of the great hills. Once and again he 
spoke to Antonio, first of the scheme, then on 
some light matter; but Antonio did no more 
than move his head in assent. And Antonio’s 
face was very white, and his lips were close shut. 

It was midnight when Duke Paul and An- 
48 


ANTONIO AND THE PRINCE 


tonio reached the plain : the moon, till now 
hidden by the mountains, shone on them, and 
seeing Antonio’s face more plainly, Paul cried, 
half in jest, half in uneasiness, “ Come, man, 
look not so glum about it ! ’Tis but the life of 
a rogue.” 

“ Indeed it is no more,” said Antonio, and 
he turned his eyes on Duke Paul. 

Paul laughed, but with poor merriment. 
Whence it came he knew not, but a strange 
sudden sense of peril and of doom had fallen 
on him. The massive quiet figure of Antonio, 
riding ever close to him, silent, stern, and 
watchful, oppressed his spirit. 

Suddenly Antonio halted and called to Mar- 
tolo to bring him a lantern : one hung from 
Martolo’s saddle, and he brought it, and went 
back. Then Antonio lit the lantern and gave 
an ivory tablet to Paul and said to him, “Write 
me your promise.” 

“ You distrust me, then ? ” cried Paul in a 
great show of indignation. 

“ I will not go till you have written the 
promise.” 

Now Paul was somewhat loath to write the 
promise, fearing that it should be found on 
Antonio’s body before he could contrive to 
remove it ; but without it Antonio declared he 
49 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


would not go. So Paul wrote, bethinking 
himself that he held safe in his house at home 
permission from the Duke to seek Antonio 
and beguile him to the city, and that with the 
witness of this commission he could come off 
safe, even though the tablet were found on 
Antonio. Taking the peril then, rather than 
fail, he wrote, setting out the promises he made 
to Antonio in case (thus he phrased it) of the 
death of his brother. And he delivered the 
tablet to Antonio ; and Antonio, restoring the 
lantern to Martolo, stowed the tablet about 
him, and they set forth again. 

As the clock in the tower of the cathedral, 
distantly booming in their ears, sounded the 
hour of two, they came to where the road 
parted. In one direction it ran level across 
the plain to the river and the city, and by this 
way they must go, if they would come to the 
secret gate and thence to the Duke s summer- 
house, But the second road left the plain, 
and mounted the hill that faces the wicket- 
gate, which is now called the Hill of Duke 
Paul. And at the parting of the road, An- 
tonio reined in his horse and sat silent for a 
great while. Again Paul, scanning his face, 
was troubled, so that Martolo, who had drawn 
near, saw him wipe a drop from his brow. 

50 


ANTONIO AND THE PRINCE 


And Paul said, For what wait we, Antonio ? 
Time presses, for it has gone two o’clock.” 

Then Antonio drew him apart, and fixing 
his eyes on him, said, “ What of the child ? 
What mean you by the child ? How does it 
profit you that the father die, if the child live ? ” 

Paul, deeming that Antonio doubted him 
and saw a snare, and holding it better to seem 
the greatest of villains than to stir suspicion 
in a man who held him in his hands, smiled 
cunningly, and answered, “ The child will grow 
sickly and pine when his father is not ahve to 
care for him.” 

“ It is enough,” said Antonio ; and again a 
flush mounted on his face, and died down again, 
and left him pale. For some think he would 
have turned from his purpose, had Paul meant 
honestly by the child. I know not. At least, 
the foul murder plotted against the child made 
him utterly relentless. 

‘‘ Let us go on and end the matter,” urged 
Paul, full of eagerness, and, again, of that 
strange uneasiness born of Antonio’s air. 

“ Ay, we will go on and finish it,” said An- 
tonio, and with that he leapt down from his 
horse. Paul did the like, for it had been agreed 
that the others, with the horses, were to await 
Antonio’s return, while the Count and Paul 
61 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


went forward on foot: and Tommasino and 
Martolo, dismounting also, tied the horses to 
trees and stood waiting Antonio’s orders. 

“ Forward ! ” cried Paul. 

“ Come, then,” said Antonio, and he turned 
to the road that mounted the hill. 

“ It is by the other road we go,” said Paul. 

“ It is by this road,” said Antonio, and he 
raised his hand and made a certain sign, whereat 
the swords of his friends leapt from their scab- 
bards, and they barred the way, so that Duke 
Paul could turn nowhere save to the road that 
mounted the hill. Then Paul’s face grew long, 
drawn, and sallow with sudden fear. “ What 
means this ? ” he cried. “ What means this, 
Antonio ? ” 

‘‘ It means, my lord, that you must mount 
the hill with me,” answered Antonio, “ even to 
the top of it, whence a man can see the city.” 

“ But for what ? ” 

“That this matter may be finished,” said 
Antonio ; and, coming to Paul, he laid a hand 
on his shoulder and turned him to the path up 
the hill. But Paul, seeing his face and the 
swords of Tommasino and Martolo that barred 
all escape, seized his hand, saying, “ Before God, 
I mean you true, Antonio ! As Christ died for 
us, I mean you true, Antonio I ” 

52 


ANTONIO AND THE PRINCE 


“ Of that I know not, and care not ; yet do 
not swear it now by Christ’s name if it be not 
true. How meant you, my lord, by your 
brother and your brother’s son ? ” 

Paul licked his lips, for they had gone dry, 
and he breathed as a man pants who has run 
far and fast. “ Y ou are three to one,” he hissed. 

“We shall be but man to man on the top of 
the hill,” said Antonio. 

Then suddenly Tommasino spoke unbidden. 
“ There is a priest in the village a mile away,” 
said he, and there was pity in his voice. 

“ Peace, Tommasino ! What priest has he 
provided for his brother ? ” 

And Tommasino said no more, but he turned 
his eyes away from the face of Duke Paul ; yet 
when he was an old man, one being in his com- 
pany heard him say he dreamed yet of it. As 
for Martolo, he bent his head and crossed him- 
self. 

Then Paul threw himself on his knees before 
Antonio and prayed him to let him go ; but 
Antonio seemed not to hear him, and stood 
silent with folded arms. Yet presently he said, 
“ Take your sword then, my lord. If I fall, 
these shall not touch you. This much I give, 
though it is more than I have right to give.” 

But Paul would not take his sword, but 
53 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


knelt, still beseeching Antonio with tears, and 
mingling prayers and curses in a flow of ago- 
nised words. 

At last Antonio plucked him from the ground 
and sternly bade him mount the hill ; and find- 
ing no help, he set out, his knees shaking be- 
neath him, while Antonio followed close upon 
him. And thus Tommasino and Martolo 
watched them go till the winding of the path 
hid them from view, when Martolo fell on his 
knees, and Tommasino drew a breath as though 
a load had rested on his chest. 

It was but a short way to the summit, but 
the path was steep, and the two went slowly, 
so that, as they came forth on the top, the first 
gleam of dawn caught them in its pale light. 
The city lay gray and drab below them, and 
the lonely tree, that stands to this day upon 
the hill, swayed in the wind with mournful 
murmurings. Paul stumbled and sank in a 
heap on the ground. And Antonio said to 
him, ‘‘ If you will, pray,” and went and leant 
against the bare trunk of the tree, a little way 
apart. But Paul, thinking on man s mercy, 
not on God’s, crawled on his knees across the 
space between and laid hold of Antonio’s legs. 
And he said nothing, but gazed up at Antonio. 
And at the silent appeal Antonio shivered for 
54 


ANTONIO AND THE PRINCE 


an instant, but he did not fly the gaze of Paul’s 
eyes, but looked down on him and answered, 
“ You must die. Yet there is your sword, and 
there a free road to the city.” 

Then Paul let go Antonio’s legs and rose, 
and drew his sword. But his hand was trem- 
bhng, and he could scarce stand. Then An- 
tonio gave to him a flask that he carried, hold- 
ing strong waters; and the wretch, drinking 
greedily, found some courage, and came sud- 
denly at Antonio before Antonio looked for 
his attack. But the Count eluded him, and 
drawing his blade awaited the attack; and 
Paul seized again the flask that he had flung 
on the ground, and drained it, and mad now 
with the fumes rushed at Antonio, shrieking 
curses and blasphemies. The sun rose on the 
moment that their blades crossed ; and before 
its rays had shone a minute, Antonio had 
driven his sword through the howling wretch’s 
lung, and Duke Paul lay dying on the grassy 
hill. 

Then Count Antonio stripped off his doublet 
and made a pillow of it for Paul’s head, and 
sat down by him, and wiped his brow, and 
disposed his body with such ease as seemed 
possible. Yet he took no pains to stanch the 
blood or to minister to the wound, for his 
55 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


intent was that Paul should die and not live. 
And Paul lay some moments on his back, 
then twisted on his side; once he flung his 
legs wide and gathered them again under his 
body, and shivered, turning on his back again : 
and his jaw fell, and he died there on the top 
of the hill. And the Count closed his eyes, 
and sat by him in silence for many minutes ; 
and once he buried his face in his hands, and 
a single sob shook him. 

But now it was growing to day, and he rose, 
and took from the Duke’s waist the broad 
silken band that he wore, wrought with golden 
embroidery on a ground of royal blue. Then 
he took Paul in his arms and set him upright 
against the trunk of the tree, and, encirchng 
tree and body with the rich scarf, he bound 
the corpse there ; and he took the ivory tablet 
from his belt and tied the riband that hung 
through a hole in it to the riband of the Order 
of St. Prisian, that was round Paul’s neck, and 
he wrote on the tablet, “ Witness my hand — 
Antonio of Monte Velluto.” And he wiped 
the blade of his sword long and carefuUy on 
the grass till it shone pure, clean, and bright 
again. Then he gazed awhile at the city, that 
grew now warm and rich in the increasing 
light of the sun, and turned on his heel and 
56 


ANTONIO AND THE PRINCE 


went down the hill by the way that he had 
come. 

At the foot, Tommasino and Martolo await- 
ed him; and when he came down alone, 
Martolo again signed the cross ; but Tomma- 
sino glanced one question, and, finding answer 
in Antonio s nod, struck his open palm on the 
quarters of Duke Paul’s horse and set it free 
to go where it would ; and the horse, being 
free, started at a canter along the road to the 
city. And Antonio mounted and set his face 
again towards the hills. For awhile he rode 
alone in front ; but when an hour was gone, 
he called to Tommasino, and, on the lad join- 
ing him, talked with him, not gaily indeed 
(that could not be), yet with calmness and 
cheerfulness on the matters that concerned 
the band. But Paul’s name did not cross his 
lips ; and the manner in which he had dealt 
with Paul on the hill rested unknown till a 
later time, when Count Antonio formally de- 
clared it, and wrote with his own hand how 
Duke Paul had died. Thus, then, Count 
Antonio rode back to the hills, having execut- 
ed on the body of Paul that which seemed to 
him right and just. 

Long had Duke Valentine waited for his 
brother in the summer-house and greatly won- 
57 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


dered that he came not. And as the morning 
grew and yet Paul came not, the Duke feared 
that in some manner Antonio had detected the 
snare, and that he held Paul a prisoner; for it 
did not enter the Duke’s mind that Antonio 
would dare to kill his brother. And when it 
was five o’clock, the Duke, heavy-eyed for 
want of sleep, left the summer-house, and 
having traversed the garden, entered his cabi- 
net and flung himself on a couch there ; and 
notwithstanding his uneasiness for his brother, 
being now very drowsy, he fell asleep. But 
before he had slept long, he was roused by 
two of his pages, who ran in crying that Duke 
Paul’s horse had come riderless to the gate 
of the city. And the Duke sprang up, smit- 
ing his thigh, and crying, “ If harm has come 
to him, I will not rest till I have Antonio’s 
head.” So he mustered a party of his guards, 
some on horseback and some on foot, and 
passed with all speed out of the city, seeking 
his brother, and vowing vengeance on the in- 
solence of Count Antonio. 

But the Duke was not first out of the city; 
for he found a stream of townsmen flocking 
across the bridge; and at the end of the bridge 
was a gathering of men, huddled close round 
a peasant who stood in the centre. The pike- 
68 


ANTONIO AND THE PRINCE 


men made a way for His Highness ; and when 
the peasant saw him, he ran to him, and rest- 
ing his hand on the neck of the Duke’s horse, 
as though he could scarce stand alone, he 
cried, pointing with his hand to the hill that 
rose to the west, ‘‘ The Duke Paul, the Duke 
Paul ! ” And no more could he say. 

“ Give him a horse, one of you, and let an- 
other lead it,” cried the Duke. “ And for- 
ward, gentlemen, whither he points ! ” 

Thus they set forth, and as they went, the 
concourse grew, some overtaking them from 
the city, some who were going on their bus- 
iness or for pleasure into the city turning and 
following after the Duke and his company. 
So that a multitude went after Valentine 
and the peasant, and they rode together at 
the head. And the Duke said thrice to the 
peasant, “ What of my brother ? ” But the 
peasant, who was an old man, did but point 
again to the hill. 

At the foot of the hill, all that had horses 
left them in charge of the boys who were of 
the party, for the Duke, presaging some fear- 
ful thing, would suffer none but grown men 
to mount with him ; and thus they went for- 
ward afoot till they reached the grassy sum- 
mit of the hill. And then the peasant sprang 
69 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


in front, crying, ‘‘ There, there ! ” and all of 
them beheld the body of Duke Paul, bound 
to the tree by the embroidered scarf, his head 
fallen on his breast, and the ivory tablet hang- 
ing from the riband of the Order of St. Fris- 
ian. And a great silence fell on them all, and 
they stood gazing at the dead prince. 

But presently Duke Valentine went for- 
ward alone; and he knelt on one knee and 
bowed his head, and kissed his brother’s right 
hand. And a shout of indignation and wrath 
went up from all the crowd, and they cried, 
“ Whose deed is this ? ” The Duke minded 
them not, but rose to his feet and laid his 
hand on the ivory tablet ; and he perceived 
that it was written by Duke Paul; and he 
read what Paul had written to Antonio ; how 
that he, the Duke, being dead, Antonio should 
come to his own again, and wed Lucia, and 
hold foremost place in the Duchy. And, this 
read, the Duke read also the subscription of 
Count Antonio — “ Witness my hand — An- 
tonio of Monte Velluto.” Then he was very 
amazed, for he had trusted his brother. Yet 
he did not refuse the testimony of the ivory 
tablet nor suspect any guile or deceit in An- 
tonio. And he stood dry-eyed, looking on 
the dead face of Duke Paul. Then, turning 
60 


ANTONIO AND THE PRINCE 


round, he cried in a loud voice, so that every 
man on the hill heard him, “ Behold the body 
of a traitor ! ” And men looked on him, and 
from him to the faces of one another, asking 
what he meant. But he spoke no other word, 
and went straightway down the hill, and 
mounted his horse again, and rode back to the 
city ; and, having come to his palace, he sent 
for his httle son, and went with him into the 
cabinet behind the great hall, where the two 
stayed alone together for many hours. And 
when the child came forth, he asked none con- 
cerning his uncle the Duke Paul. 

Now all the company had followed down 
from the hill after the Duke, and no man 
dared to touch the body unbidden. Two days 
passed, and a great storm came, so that the 
rain beat on Paul’s face and the lightning 
blackened it. But on the third day, when the 
storm had ceased, the Duke bade the Lieu- 
tenant of the Guard to go by night and bring 
the body of Paul ; and the Lieutenant and 
his men flung a cloak over the face, and, hav- 
ing thus done, brought the body into the city 
at the break of day : yet the great square was 
full of folk watching in awe and silence. And 
they took the body to the Cathedral, and 
buried it under the wall on the north side in 
5 61 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


the shade of a cypress tree, laying a plain flat 
stone over it. And Duke Valentine gave 
great sums for masses to be said for the re- 
pose of his brother’s soul. Yet there are few 
men who will go by night to the Hill of Duke 
Paul; and even now when I write, there is a 
man in the city who has lost his senses and is 
an idiot: he, they say, went to the hill on the 
night of the 15th of the month wherein Paul 
died, and came back mumbling things terrible 
to hear. But whether he went because he 
lacked his senses, or lost his senses by reason 
of the thing he saw when he went, I know 
not. 

Thus died Duke Paul the traitor. Yet, 
though the Duke his brother knew that what 
was done upon him was nothing else than he 
had deserved and should have suffered had he 
been brought alive to justice, he was very 
wroth with Count Antonio, holding it inso- 
lence that any man should lay hands on one of 
his blood, and, of his own will, execute sen- 
tence upon a criminal of a degree so exalted. 
Therefore he sent word to Antonio, that if he 
caught him, he would hang him on the hiU 
from the branches of the tree to which Antonio 
had bound Paul, and would leave his body 
there for three times three days. And, this 
62 


ANTONIO AND THE PRINCE 


message coming to Antonio, he sent one 
privily by night to the gate of the city, who 
laid outside the gate a letter for the Duke; 
and in the letter was written, “ God chooses 
the hand. All is well.” 

And Count Antonio abode still an outlaw in 
the mountains, and the Lady Lucia mourned 
in the city. 


63 


CHAPTER III 


COUNT ANTONIO AND THE PRINCE OF 
MANTIVOGLIA 

I KNOW of naught by which a man may better 
be judged than by his bearing in matters of 
love. What know I of love, say you — I, 
whose head is gray, and shaven to boot ? 
True, it is gray, and it is shaven. But once it 
was brown, and the tonsure came not there 
till I had lived thirty years and borne arms for 
twelve. Then came death to one I loved, and 
the tonsure to me. Therefore, O ye proud 
young men and laughing girls, old Ambrose 
knows of love, though his knowledge be only 
like the memory that a man has of a glorious 
red-gold sunset which his eyes saw a year ago : 
cold are the tints, gone the richness, sober and 
faint the picture. Yet it is something; he 
sees no more, but he has seen ; and sometimes 
still I seem to see a face that last I saw smil- 
ing in death. They tell me such thoughts are 
not fitting in me, but I doubt their doing a 
man much harm; for they make him take joy 
when others reap the happiness that he, fore- 
64 


ANTONIO AND MANTIVOGLIA 


stalled by fate’s sickle, could not garner. But 
enough ! It is of Count Antonio I would 
write, and not of my poor self. And the story 
may be worth the reading — or would be, had 
I more skill to pen it. 

Now in the summer of the second year of 
Count Antonio’s banishment, when the fierce 
anger of Duke Valentine was yet hot for the 
presumption shown by the Count in the matter 
of Duke Paul’s death, a messenger came privily 
to where the band lay hidden in the hills, 
bringing greeting to Antonio from the Prince 
of Mantivogha, between whom and the Duke 
there was great enmity. For in days gone by 
Firmola had paid tribute to Mantivoglia, and 
this burden had been broken off only some 
thirty years ; and the Prince, learning that 
Antonio was at variance with Duke Valentine, 
perceived an opportunity, and sent to Antonio, 
praying him very courteously to visit Manti- 
voglia and be his guest. Antonio, who knew 
the Prince well, sent him thanks, and, having 
made dispositions for the safety of his com- 
pany and set Tommasino in charge of it, him- 
self rode with the man they called Bena, and, 
having crossed the frontier, came on the second 
day to Mantivoglia. Here he was received 
with great state, and all in the city were eager 
65 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


to see him, having heard how he had dealt 
with Duke Paul and how he now renounced 
the authority of Valentine. And the Prince 
lodged him in his Palace, and prepared a 
banquet for him, and set him on the right 
hand of the Princess, who was a very fair lady, 
learned, and of excellent wit ; indeed, I have 
by me certain stories which she composed, and 
would read on summer evenings in the garden ; 
and it may be that, if I live, I will make 
known certain of them. Others there are that 
only the discreet should read ; for what to one 
age is but mirth turns in the mind of the next 
to unseemhness and ribaldry. This Princess, 
then, was very gracious to the Count, and 
spared no effort to give him pleasure ; and she 
asked him very many things concerning the 
Lady Lucia, saying at last, “ Is she fairer than 
I, my lord ? ” But Antonio answered, with a 
laugh, “ The moon is not fairer than the sun, 
nor the sun than the moon : yet they are dif- 
ferent.” And the Princess laughed also, say- 
ing merrily, “ Well parried, my lord I ” And 
she rose and went with the Prince and Antonio 
into the garden. Then the Prince opened to 
Antonio what was in his mind, saying, “ Take 
what command you will in my service, and 
come with me against Firmola; and when we 
66 


ANTONIO AND MANTIVOGLIA 


have brought Valentine to his knees, I will 
take what was my father s, and should be 
mine : and you shall wring from him your 
pardon and the hand of your lady.” And the 
Princess also entreated him. But Antonio 
answered, ‘‘ I cannot do it. If Your Highness 
rides to Firmola, it is likely enough that I also 
may ride thither ; but I shall ride to put my 
sword at the service of the Duke. For, al- 
though he is not my friend, yet his enemies 
are mine.” And from this they could not turn 
him. Then the Prince praised him, saying, “ I 
love you more for denying me, Antonio ; and 
when I send word of my coming to Valentine, I 
will tell him also of what you have done. And 
if we meet by the walls of Firmola, we will fight 
like men ; and, after that, you shall come again 
to Mantivoglia ; ” and he drank wine with An- 
tonio, and so bade him God-speed. And the 
Princess, when her husband was gone, looked 
at the Count and said, “Valentine will not give 
her to you. Why will not you take her ? ” 

But Antonio answered : “ The price is too 
high.” 

‘ ‘ I would not have a man who thought any 
price too high,” cried the Princess. 

“ Then your Highness would mate with a 
rogue ? ” asked Count Antonio, smiling. 

67 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


“ If he were one for my sake only,” said she, 
fixing her eyes on his face and sighing lightly, 
as ladies sigh when they would tell something, 
and yet not too much nor in words that can 
be repeated. But Antonio kissed her hand, 
and took leave of her; and with another sigh 
she watched him go. 

But when the middle of the next month 
came, the Prince of Mantivoglia gathered an 
army of three thousand men, of whom seven- 
teen hundred were mounted, and crossed the 
frontier, directing his march towards Firmola 
by way of the base of Mount Agnino and the 
road to the village of Rilano. The Duke, 
hearing of his approach, mustered his Guards 
to the number of eight hundred and fifty men, 
and armed besides hard upon two thousand of 
the townsmen and apprentices, taking an oath 
of them that they would serve him loyally ; for 
he feared and distrusted them ; and of the 
whole force, eleven hundred had horses. But 
Count Antonio lay still in the mountains and 
did not offer to come to the Duke’s aid. 

“ Will you not pray his leave to come and 
fight for him? ” asked Tommasino. 

“ He will love to beat the Prince without 
my aid, if he can,” said Antonio. “ Heaven 
forbid that I should seem to snatch at glory, 
68 


ANTONIO AND MANTIVOGLIA 


and make a chance for myself from his neces- 
sity.” 

So he abode two days where he was ; and 
then there came a shepherd, who said, “ My 
lord, the Duke has marched out of the city 
and lay last night at Rilano, and is to-day 
stretched across the road that leads from the 
spurs of Agnino to Rilano, his right wing rest- 
ing on the river. There he w^aits the approach 
of the Prince ; and they say that at daybreak 
to-morrow the Prince will attack.” 

Then Antonio rose, saying, “ What of the 
night ? ” 

Now the night was very dark, and the fog 
hung like a gray cloak over the plain. And 
Antonio collected all his men to the number 
of threescore and five, all well-armed and well 
horsed ; and he bade them march very silently 
and with great caution, and led them down 
into the plain. And all the night they rode 
softly, husbanding their strength and sparing 
their horses ; and an hour before the break of 
day they passed through the outskirts of Ri- 
lano and halted a mile beyond the village, see- 
ing the fires of the Duke’s bivouacs stretched 
across the road in front of them ; and beyond 
there were other fires where the Prince of 
Mantivoglia lay encamped. And Bena said, 
69 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


“ The Prince will be too strong for the Duke, 
my lord.” 

“ If he be, we also shall fight to-morrow, 
Bena,” answered Antonio. 

‘ ‘ I trust, then, that they prove at least well 
matched,” said Bena; for he loved to fight, 
and yet was ashamed to wish that the Duke 
should be defeated. 

Then Count Antonio took counsel with 
Tommasino; and they led the band very se- 
cretly across the rear of the Duke’s camp till 
they came to the river. There was a mill on 
the river, and by the mill a great covered barn 
where the sacks of grain stood ; and Antonio, 
having roused the miller, told him that he 
came to aid the Duke, and not to fight against 
him, and posted his men in this great barn; so 
that they were behind the right wing of the 
Duke’s army, and were hidden from sight. 
Day was dawning now : the camp-fires paled 
in the growing light, and the sounds of prep- 
aration were heard from the camp. And 
from the Prince’s quarters also came the noise 
of trumpets calling the men to arms. 

At four in the morning the battle was 
joined, Antonio standing with Tommasino 
and watching from the mill. Now Duke Val- 
entine had placed his own guards on either 
70 


ANTONIO AND MANTIVOGLIA 

wing and the townsmen in the centre; but 
the Prince had posted the flower of his troops 
in the centre ; and he rode there himself, sur- 
rounded by many lords and gentlemen ; and 
with great valour and impetuosity he flung 
himself against the townsmen, recking Httle 
of how he fared on either wing. This careless 
haste did not pass unnoticed by the Duke, 
who was a cool man and wore a good head ; 
and he said to Lorenzo, one of his lords who 
was with him, If we win on right and left, it 
will not hurt us to lose in the middle ; ” and 
he would not strengthen the townsmen against 
the Prince, but rather drew off more of them, 
and chiefly the stoutest and best equipped, 
whom he divided between the right wing 
where he himself commanded, and the left 
which Lorenzo led. Nay, men declare that 
he was not ill-pleased to see the brunt of the 
strife and the heaviest loss fall on the appren- 
tices and townsmen. For a while indeed these 
stood bravely ; but the Prince’s chivalry came 
at them in flerce pride and gallant scorn, and 
bore them down with the weight of armour 
and horses, the Prince himself leading on a 
white charger and with his own hand slaying 
Glinka, who was head of the city-bands and a 
great champion among them. But Duke Val- 
71 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


entine and Lorenzo upheld the battle on the 
wings, and pressed back the enemy there ; and 
the Duke would not send aid to the townsmen 
in the centre, saying, “ I shall be ready for the 
Prince as soon as the Prince is ready for me, 
and I can spare some of those turbulent ap- 
prentices.” And he smiled his crafty smile, 
adding, “ From enemies also a wise man may 
suck good ; ” and he pressed forward on the 
right, fighting more fiercely than was his cus- 
tom. But when Antonio beheld the towns- 
men hard pressed and being ridden down by 
the Prince of Mantivoglia*s knights, and saw 
that the Duke would not aid them, he grew 
very hot and angry, and said to Tommasino, 
‘‘These men have loved my house, Tomma- 
sino. It may be that I spoil His Highness’s 
plan, but are we to stand here while they 
perish ? ” 

“ A fig for His Highness’s plan ! ” said Tom- 
masino ; and Bena gave a cry of joy and sprang, 
unbidden, on his horse. 

“ Since you are up, Bena,” said the Count, 
“stay up, and let the others mount. The 
Duke’s plan, if I read it aright, is craftier than 
I love, and I do not choose to understand it.” 

Then, when the townsmen’s line was giving 
way before the Prince, and the apprentices, 
72 


ANTONIO AND MANTIVOGLIA 


conceiving themselves to be shamefully de- 
serted, were more of a mind to run away than 
to fight any more, suddenly Antonio rode forth 
from the mill. He and his company came at 
full gallop ; but he himself was ten yards ahead 
of Bena and Tommasino, for all that they 
raced after him. And he cried aloud, ‘‘ To 
me, men of Firmola, to me, Antonio of Monte 
Velluto !” and they beheld him with utter as- 
tonishment and great joy. For his helmet was 
fallen from his head, and his fair hair gleamed 
in the sun, and the light of battle played on his 
face. And the band followed him, and, 
though they had for the most part no armour, 
yet such was the fury of their rush, and such 
the mettle and strength of their horses, that 
they made light of meeting the Prince’s 
knights in full tilt. And the townsmen cried, 
“ It is the Count! To death after the Count! ” 
And Antonio raised the great sword that he 
carried, and rode at the Marshal of the Prince’s 
Palace, who was in the van of the fight, and 
he split helmet and head with a blow. Then 
he came to where the Prince himself was, and 
the great sword was raised again, and the 
Prince rode to meet him, saying, “ If I do not 
die now, I shall not die to-day.” But when 
Antonio saw the Prince, he brought his sword 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


to his side and bowed and turned aside, and 
engaged the most skilful of the Mantivoglian 
knights. And he fought that day like a man 
mad; but he would not strike the Prince of 
Mantivoglia. And after a while the Prince 
ceased to seek him ; and a flatterer said to the 
Prince, “ He is bold against us, but he fears 
you, my lord.” But the Prince said, “ Peace, 
fool. Go and flght.” For he knew that not 
fear, but friendship, forbade Antonio to assail 
him. 

Yet by now the rout of the townsmen was 
stayed and they were holding their own again 
in good heart and courage, while both on the 
right and on the left the Duke pressed on and 
held the advantage. Then the Prince of Man- 
tivoglia perceived that he was in a dangerous 
plight, for he was in peril of being worsted 
along his whole line ; for his knights did no 
more than hold a doubtful balance against the 
townsmen and Antonio’s company, while the 
Duke and Lorenzo were victorious on either 
wing ; and he knew that if the Duke got in 
rear of him and lay between him and Mount 
Agnino, he would be sore put to it to find a 
means of retreat. Therefore he left the centre 
and rode to the left of his line and himself 
faced Duke Valentine. Yet slowly was he 
74 


ANTONIO AND MANTIVOGLIA 


driven back, and he gave way sullenly, obsti- 
nately, and in good order, himself performing 
many gallant deeds, and seeking to come to a 
conflict with the Duke. But the Duke, seeing 
that the day was likely to be his, would not 
meet him and chose to expose his person to no 
more danger: ‘‘For,” he said, “a soldier who 
is killed is a good soldier; but a chief who is 
killed save for some great object is a bad chief.” 
And he bided his time and slowly pressed the 
Prince back, seeking rather to win the battle 
than the praise of bravery. But when Count 
Antonio saw that all went well, and that the 
enemy were in retreat, he halted his band ; and 
at this they murmured, Bena daring to say, 
“ My lord, we have had dinner, and may we 
not have supper also ? ” Antonio smiled at 
Bena, but would not hsten. 

“No,” said he. “His Highness has won 
the victory by his skill and cunning. I did 
but move to save my friends. It is enough. 
Shall I seek to rob him of his glory ? For the 
ignorant folk, counting the arm more honour- 
able than the head, will give me more glory 
than him if I continue in the fight.” And 
thus, not being willing to force his aid on a man 
who hated to receive it, he drew off his band. 
Awhile he waited ; but when he saw that the 
75 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


Prince was surely beaten, and that the Duke 
held victory in his hand, he gave the word that 
they should return by the way they had come. 

‘‘ Indeed,” said Tommasino, laughing, “ it 
may be wisdom as well as good manners, 
cousin. For I would not trust myself to Val- 
entine if he be victorious, for all the service 
which we have done him in saving the appren- 
tices he loves so well.'’ 

So Antonio’s band turned and rode off from 
the field, and they passed through Rilano. But 
they found the village desolate ; for report had 
come from the field that the Duke’s line was 
broken, and that in a short space the Prince of 
Mantivoglia would advance in triumph, and, 
having sacked Rilano, would go against Fir- 
mola, where there were but a few old men and 
boys left to guard the walls against him. And 
one peasant, whom they found hiding in the 
wood by the road, said there was panic in the 
city, and that many were escaping from it be- 
fore the enemy should appear. 

“ It is months since I saw Firmola,” said 
Antonio with a smile. “ Let us ride there and 
reassure these timid folk. For my lord the 
Duke has surely by now won the victory, and 
he will pursue the Prince till he yields peace 
and abandons the tribute.” 

76 


ANTONIO AND MANTIVOGLIA 


Now a great excitement rose in the band at 
these words; for although they had lost ten 
men in the battle and five more were disabled, 
yet they were fifty stout and ready; and it 
was not likely that there was any force in Fir- 
mola that could oppose them. And Martolo, 
who rode with Tommasino, whispered to him, 
“ My lord, my lord, shall we carry off the Lady 
Lucia before His Highness can return? ” 

Tommasino glanced at Antonio. ‘‘Nay, I 
know not what my cousin purposes,” said he. 

Then Antonio bade Bena and Martolo ride 
on ahead, taking the best horses, and tell the 
people at Firmola that victory was with the 
Duke, and that His Highness’s servant, An- 
tonio of Monte Velluto, was at hand to protect 
the city till His Highness should return in 
triumph. And the two, going ahead while the 
rest of the band took their mid-day meal, met 
many ladies and certain rich merchants and old 
men escaping from the city, and turned them 
back, saying that all was well ; and the ladies 
would fain have gone on and met Antonio ; 
but the merchants, hearing that he was there, 
made haste to get within the walls again, fear- 
ing that he would levy a toll on them for the 
poor, as his custom was. At this Bena laughed 
mightily, and drew rein, saying, “ These rabbits 
6 77 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 

will run quicker back to their burrow than we 
could ride, Martolo. Let us rest awhile under 
a tree ; I have a flask of wine in my saddle- 
bag.” So they rested ; and while they rested, 
they saw what amazed them ; for a lady rode 
alone towards them on a palfrey, and though 
the merchants met her and spoke with her, yet 
she rode on. And when she came to the tree 
where Bena and Martolo were, they sprang 
up and bared their heads; for she was the 
I^ady Lucia; and her face was full of fear and 
eagerness as she said, “No guard is kept to- 
day, even on helpless ladies. Is it true that 
my lord is near ? ” 

“ Yes, he is near,” said Bena, kissing her 
hand. “ See, there is the dust of his company 
on the road.” 

“ Go, one of you, and say that I wait for 
him,” she commanded; so Martolo rode on to 
carry the news farther, and Bena went to An- 
tonio and said, “ Heaven, my lord, sends for- 
tune. The Lady Lucia has escaped from the 
city, and awaits you under yonder tree.” 

And when Tommasino heard this, he put 
out his hand suddenly and caught Antonio’s 
hand and pressed it, saying, “ Go alone, and 
bring her here : we will wait : the Duke will 
not be here for many hours yet*” 

78 


ANTONIO AND MANTIVOGLIA 


Then Antonio rode alone to the tree where 
Lucia was ; and because he had not seen her 
for many months, he leapt down from his horse 
and came running to her, and, kneeling, kissed 
her hand ; but she, who stood now by her pal- 
frey’s side, flung her arms about his neck and 
fell with tears and laughter into his arms, say- 
ing, “ Antonio, Antonio ! Heaven is with us, 
Antonio. ” 

“Yes,” said he. “For His Highness has 
won the day.” 

“ Have not we won the day also ? ” said she, 
reaching up and laying her hands on his 
shoulders. 

“ Heart of my heart,” said he softly, as he 
looked in her eyes. 

“ The cage is opened, and, Antonio, the bird 
is free,” she whispered, and her eyes danced 
and her cheek went red. “ Lift me to my sad- 
dle, Antonio.” 

The Count obeyed her, and himself mounted ; 
and she said, “We can reach the frontier in 
three hours, and there — there, Antonio, none 
fears the Duke’s wrath.” And Antonio knew 
what she would say, save that she would not 
speak it bluntly — that there they could find a 
priest to marry them. And his face was pale 
as he smiled at her. Then he laid his hand on 
79 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


her bridle and turned her palfrey’s head towards 
Firmola. Her eyes darted a swift question at 
him, and she cried low, ‘‘ Thither, Antonio ? ” 
Then he answered her, bending stiU his look 
on her, ‘‘Alas, I am no learned man, nor a 
doctor skilled in matters of casuistry and nice 
distinctions. I can but do what the blood that 
is in me tells me a gentleman should do. To- 
day, sweetheart — ah, will you not hide your 
face from me, sweetheart, that my words may 
not die in my mouth ? — to-day our lord the 
Duke fights against the enemies of our city, 
holding for us in hard battle the liberty that 
we have won, and bearing the banner of Fir- 
mola high to heaven in victory.” 

She listened with strained frightened face ; 
and the horses moved at a walk towards Fir- 
mola. And she laid her hand on his arm, say- 
ing again, “ Antonio ! ” 

“ And I have fought with my lord to-day, 
and I would be at his side now, except that I 
do his pleasure better by leaving him to triumph 
alone. But my hand has been with him to-day, 
and my heart is with him to-day. Tell me, 
sweetheart, if I rode forth to war and left you 
alone, would you do aught against me till I 
returned ? ” 

She did not answer him. 

80 


ANTONIO AND MANTIVOGLIA 


“ A Prince’s city,” said he, “ should be as 
his faithful wife ; and when he goes to meet the 
enemy, none at home should raise a hand 
against him; above all may not one who has 
fought by his side. For to stand side by side 
in battle is a promise and a compact between 
man and man, even as though man swore to 
man on a holy relic.” 

Then she understood what he would say, 
and she looked away from him across the 
plain ; and a tear rolled down her cheek as she 
said, “ Indeed, my lord, the error lies in my 
thoughts; for I fancied that your love was 
mine.” 

Antonio leant from his saddle and lightly 
touched her hair. “Was that indeed your 
fancy ? ” said he. “ And I prove it untrue ? ” 

“ You carry me back to my prison,” she 
said. “And you will ride away.” 

“ And so I love you not ? ” he asked. 

“No, you love me not,” said she; and her 
voice caught in a sob. 

“ See,” said he ; “ we draw near to Firmola, 
and the city gates are open ; and, look, they 
raise a flag on the Duke’s palace ; and there is 
joy for the victory that Martolo has told them 
of. And in all the Duchy there are but 
two black hearts that burn with treacherous 
81 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


thoughts against His Highness, setting their 
own infinite joy above the honour and faith 
they owe him.” 

“ Nay, but are there two ? ” she asked, turn- 
ing her face from him. 

“ In truth I would love to think there was 
but one,” said he. “ And that one beats in 
me, sweetheart, and so mightily, that I think 
it will burst the walls of my body, and I shall 
die.” 

“ Yet we ride to Firmola,” said she. 

“Yet, by Christ’s grace,” said Count An- 
tonio, “ we ride to Firmola.” 

Then the Lady Lucia suddenly dropped her 
bridle on the neck of her palfrey and caught 
Antonio’s right hand in her two hands and said 
to him, “ When I pray, to-night, I will pray 
for the cleansing of the black heart, Antonio. 
And I will make a wreath and carry it to the 
Duke and kiss his hand for his victory. And 
I will set lights in my window and flags on my 
house ; and I will give my people a feast ; and 
I will sing and laugh for the triumph of the 
city and for the freedom this day has won for 
us : and when I have done all this, what may I 
do then, Antonio ? ” 

“ I am so cruel,” said he, “ that then I would 
have you weep a little : yet spoil not the love- 
82 


ANTONIO AND MANTIVOGLIA 

liest eyes in all the world ; for if you dim them, 
it may be that they will not shine like stars 
across the plain and even into the hut where I 
live among the hills.” 

“ Do they shine bright, Antonio ? ” 

“ As the gems on the Gates of Heaven,” he 
answered ; and he reined in his horse and gave 
her bridle into her hands. And then for many 
minutes neither spoke ; and Count Antonio 
kissed her lips, and she his ; and they promised 
with the eyes what they needed not to promise 
with the tongue. And the Lady Lucia went 
alone on her way to Firmola. But the Count 
sat still like a statue of marble on his horse, 
and watched her as she rode. And there he 
stayed till the gates of the city received her 
and the walls hid her from his sight ; and the 
old men on the walls saw him and knew him, 
and asked, ‘ ‘ Does he come against us ? But 
it was against the Prince of Mantivoglia that 
we swore to fight.” And they watched him 
till he turned and rode at a foot’s pace away 
from the city. And now as he rode his brow 
was smooth and calm and there was a smile on 
his lips. 

But when Antonio had ridden two or three 
miles and came where he had left the band, he 
could see none of them. And a peasant came 
83 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


running to him in great fright and said, “ My 
lord, your mon are gone again to aid the 
Duke; for the Prince has done great deeds, 
and turned the fight, and it is again very 
doubtful : and my lord Tommasino bade me 
say that he knew your mind, and was gone to 
fight for Firmola.” 

Then Antonio, wondering greatly at the 
news, set his horse to a gallop and passed 
through Rilano at furious speed, and rode on 
towards Agnino; and it was now afternoon. 
Presently he saw the armies, but they seemed 
to lie idle, over against one another. And, 
riding on, he met Bena, who was come to seek 
him. And Bena said, “The Prince and his 
knights have fought like devils, my lord, and 
the townsmen grew fearful again when you 
were gone ; and we, coming back, have fought 
again. But now a truce has sounded, and the 
Prince and the Duke are meeting in conference 
between the armies. Yet they say that no 
peace will be made; for the Prince, taking 
heart from his sudden success, though he is 
willing to abandon the tribute, asks something 
in return which the Duke will not grant. Yet 
perhaps he has granted it by now, for his men 
are weary. ” 

“ He should grant nothing,” cried Antonio, 
84 


ANTONIO AND MANTIVOGLIA 


and galloped on again. But Bena said to him- 
self with an oath, “ He has sent back the lady 1 
The saints save us ! ” and followed Antonio 
with a laugh on his face. 

But Antonio, thinking nothing of his own 
safety, rode full into the ranks of the Duke’s 
Guard, saying, “ Where does my lord talk 
with the Prince ? ” And they showed him 
where the place was ; for the Prince and the 
Duke sat alone under a tree between the two 
arrays. And the Duke looked harsh and 
resolute, while the Prince was very courte- 
ously entreating him. 

“ Indeed,” said he, ‘‘ so doubtful has the day 
been, my lord, that I might well refuse to 
abandon the tribute and try again to-morrow 
the issue of the fight. But, since so many 
brave men have fallen on both sides, I am 
willing to abandon it, asking of you only such 
favour as would be conceded to a simple gen- 
tleman asking of his friend. And yet you will 
not grant it me, and thus bring peace between 
us and our peoples.” 

Duke Valentine frowned and bit his lip; 
and the Prince rose from where he had been 
seated, and lifted his hand to the sky, and 
said, “ So be it, my lord ; on your head lies the 
blame. For to-morrow I will attack again ; 

85 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


and, as God lives, I will not rest till the neck 
of the city of Firmola is under my foot, or my 
head rolls from my shoulders by your sword. ” 

Then Duke Valentine paced up and down, 
pondering deeply. For he was a man that 
hated to yield aught, and beyond all else hated 
what the Prince of Mantivoglia asked of him. 
Yet he feared greatly to refuse; for the towns- 
men had no stomach for another fight and 
had threatened to march home if he would 
not make peace with the Prince. Therefore he 
turned to the Prince, and, frowning heavily, 
was about to say, “ Since it must be so, so let 
it be,” when suddenly the Count Antonio rode 
up and leapt from his horse, crying, “ Yield 
nothing, my lord, yield nothing ! For if you 
will tell me what to do, and suffer me to be 
your hand, we will drive the enemy over our 
borders with great loss.” 

Then the Prince of Mantivoglia fell to laugh- 
ing, and he came to Antonio and put his arm 
about his neck, saying, “Peace, peace, thou 
foolish man ! ” 

Antonio saluted him with all deference, but 
he answered, “ I must give good counsel to 
my lord the Duke.” And he turned to the 
Duke again, saying, “Yield nothing to the 
Prince, my lord.” 


86 


ANTONIO AND MANTIVOGLIA 


Duke Valentine’s lips curved in his slow 
smile as he looked at Antonio. “ Is that in- 
deed your counsel ? And will you swear, An- 
tonio, to give me your aid against the Prince 
so long as the war lasts, if I follow it ? ” 

“Truly, I swear it,” cried Antonio. “Yet 
what need is there of an oath ? Am I not 
Your Highness’s servant, bound to obey with- 
out an oath ? ” 

“Nay, but you do not tell him ” began 

the Prince angrily. 

Duke Valentine smiled again; he was ever 
desirous to make a show of fairness where he 
risked nothing by it; and he gazed a moment 
on Antonio’s face ; then he answered to the 
Prince of Mantivoglia, “ I know the man, my 
lord. I know him in his strength and in his 
folly. Do not we know one another, An- 
tonio ? ” 

“Indeed, I know not all Your Highness’s 
mind,” answered Antonio. 

“ Well, I will tell him,” said Duke Valen- 
tine. “This Prince, Antonio, has consented 
to a peace, and to abandon all claim to tribute 
from our city, on one condition; which is, 
that I, the Duke, shall do at his demand what 
of my own free and sovereign will I would 
not do.” 


87 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


“ His demand is not fitting nor warranted 
by his power,” said Antonio ; but in spite of 
his words the Prince of Mantivoglia passed his 
arm through his, and laughed ruefully, whis- 
pering, “ Peace, man, peace.” 

“ And thus I, the Duke, having bowed my 
will to his, shall return to Firmola, not beaten 
indeed, yet half-beaten and cowed by the 
power of Mantivoglia.” 

“It shall not be, my lord,” cried Count 
Antonio. 

“Yet, my lord Duke, you do not tell him 
what the condition is,” said the Prince. 

“ Why, it is nothing else than that I should 
pardon you and suffer you to wed the Lady 
Lucia,” said Duke Valentine. 

Then Count Antonio loosed himself from 
the arm of the Prince and bent and kissed the 
Prince’s hand ; but he said, “ Is this thing to 
come twice on a man in one day ? For it is but 
an hour or less that I parted from the lady of 
whom you speak ; and if her eyes could not 
move me, what else shall move me ? ” And he 
told them briefly of his meeting with the Lady 
Lucia. But Duke Valentine was wroth with 
the shame that a generous act rouses in a heart 
that knows no generosity ; and the Prince was 
yet more wroth, and he said to Duke Valen- 
88 


ANTONIO AND MANTIVOGLIA 


tine, “ Were there any honour in you, my lord, 
you would not need my prayers to pardon 
him.” 

At this the Duke’s face grew very dark; and 
he cried angrily, “ Get back to your own line, 
my lord, or the truce shall not save you.” And 
he turned to Antonio and said, “ Three hours 
do I give you to get hence, before I pursue.” 

Antonio bowed low to him and to the Prince ; 
and they three parted, the two princes in bitter 
wrath and set again on fighting to the end, 
the one because he was ashamed and yet obsti- 
nate, the other for scorn of a rancour that 
found no place in himself. But Count Antonio 
went back to his company and drew it some 
little way off from both armies ; and he said to 
Tommasino, “ The truce is ended, and they will 
fight again so soon as the men have had some 
rest ; ” and he told Tommasino what had passed. 
Then he sat silent again ; but presently he laid 
hold of his cousin’s arm, saying, “ Look you, 
Tommasino, princes are sometimes fools ; and 
hence come trouble and death to honest hum- 
ble folk. It is a sore business that they fight 
again to-morrow, and not now for any great 
matter, but because they are bitter against one 
another on my account. Cannot I stop them, 
Tommasino ? ” 


89 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


“ Ay, if you have five thousand men and not 
thirty-five — for that is the sum of us now, 
counting Martolo, who is back from Firmola.” 

Antonio looked thoughtfully through the 
dusk of evening which now fell. “ They will 
not fight to-night,” he said. “I am weary of 
this blood-letting.” And Tommasino saw that 
there was something in his mind. 

Now the night fell dark again and foggy, 
even as the night before ; and none in either 
army dared to move, and even the sentries 
could see no more than a few yards before 
them. But Antonio’s men, being accustomed 
to ride in the dark and to find their way through 
mists both in plain and hill, could see more 
clearly ; and Antonio divided them into two 
parties, himself leading one, and giving the 
other into Tommasino ’s charge. Having very 
securely tethered their horses, they set forth, 
crawling on their bellies through the grass. 
Antonio with his party made for the camp of 
the Prince, while Tommasino and his party 
directed their way towards the Duke’s bivouacs. 
And they saw the fires very dimly through the 
mist, and both parties passed the sentries un- 
observed, and made their way to the centre of 
the camps. Then, on the stroke of midnight, 
a strange stir arose in both the camps, Noth- 

90 


ANTONIO AND MANTIVOGLIA 

ing could be seen by reason of the darkness and 
the mist ; but suddenly cries arose, and men 
ran to and fro ; and a cry went up from the 
Duke’s camp, “ They are behind us ! They 
are behind us ! We are surrounded ! ” And 
in the Prince’s camp also was great fear ; for 
from behind them, towards where the spurs of 
Mount Agnino began, there came shouts of 
“ At them, at them I Charge ! ” And the 
Prince’s officers, perceiving the cries to be 
from men of Firmola (and this they knew by 
reason of certain differences in the phrasing of 
words), conceived that the Duke had got be- 
hind them, and was lying across their way of 
retreat. 

Then the Duke, hearing the shouts in his 
own camp, ran out from his tent; and he was 
met by hundreds of the townsmen, who cried, 
“ My lord, we are surrounded ! ” For An- 
tonio’s men had gone to the townsmen and 
shown them how they might escape more 
fighting ; and the townsmen were nothing 
loth ; and they insisted with the Duke that a 
body of men on horse-back had passed behind 
them. So the Duke sent out scouts, who could 
see nothing of the horsemen. But then the 
townsmen cried, some being in the secret, 
others not, ‘‘ Then they have ridden past us, 
91 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


and are making for Firmola. And they wiU 
do Heaven knows what there. Lead us after 
them, my lord!” And the Duke was very 
angry ; but he was also greatly afraid, for he 
perceived that there was a stir in the Prince’s 
camp also, and heard shouts from there, but 
could not distinguish what was said. And 
while he considered what to do, the townsmen 
formed their ranks and sent him word that they 
were for Firmola ; and when he threatened 
them with his Guard, they rejoined that one 
death was as good as another ; and the Duke 
gnawed his nails and went pale with rage. But 
Count Antonio’s men, seeing how well the plan 
had sped, crept again out from the camp, and 
returned to where they had tethered their 
horses, and mounted, each taking a spare horse. 
And before they had been there long, they 
heard trumpets sound in the Duke’s camp, and 
the camp was struck, and the Duke and aU 
his force began to retreat on Rilano, throwing 
out many scouts, and moving very cautiously 
in the darkness and mist. Yet when they 
came on nobody they marched more quickly, 
even the Duke himself now believing that the 
Prince of Mantivoglia had of a purpose allowed 
the stir in his camp to be seen and heard, in 
order that he might detach a column to Fir- 


ANTONIO AND MANTIVOGLIA 


mola unobserved and attack the city before the 
Duke came up. Therefore he now pressed on, 
saying, “ I doubt not that the Prince himself 
is with the troop that has gone to Firmola.” 
And all night long they marched across the 
plain, covering a space of eighteen miles ; and 
just before the break of day they came to the 
city. 

Thus did it fall out with the army of Duke 
Valentine. But the Prince of Mantivoglia had 
been no less bewildered ; for when he sent out 
men to see what the cries behind the camp 
meant, he found no man ; but he still heard 
scattered cries among the rising ground, where 
the hills begin. And he in his turn saw a stir 
in the camp opposite to him. And, being an 
impetuous Prince, as he had shown both in 
evil and in good that day, he snatched up his 
sword, swearing that he would find the truth 
of the matter, and bidding his officers wait his 
return and not be drawn from their position 
before he came again to them ; and taking 
some of his younger knights and a few more, 
he passed out of his camp, and paused for a 
moment, bidding those with him spread them- 
selves out in a thin line, in order the better to 
reconnoitre, and that, if some fell into an 
ambuscade, others might survive to carry the 
7 93 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


news back to the camp. And he, having given 
his order, himself stood resting on his sword. 
But in an instant, before he could so much as 
lift the point of his sword from the ground, 
silent blurred shapes came from the mist, and 
were in front and behind and round him ; and 
they looked so strange that he raised his hand 
to cross himself; but then a scarf was thrown 
over his mouth, and he was seized by eight 
strong hands and held so that he could not 
struggle ; and neither could he cry out by 
reason of the scarf across his mouth. And 
they that held him began to run rapidly ; and 
he was carried out of the camp without the 
knowledge of any of those who were with him, 
and they, missing their leader, fell presently 
into a great consternation, and ran to and fro 
in the gloom crying, “The Prince? Have 
you seen the Prince ? Is His Highness with 
you? In God’s name, has the Prince been 
this way ? ” But they did not find him, and 
they grew more confounded, stumbling against 
one another and being much afraid. And when 
the Prince was nowhere to be found, they lost 
heart, and began to fall back towards their own 
borders, skirting the base of Agnino. And 
their retreat grew quicker ; and at last, when 
morning came, they were near the border; 

94 


ANTONIO AND MANTIVOGLIA 


but the fog still wrapped all the plain in ob- 
scurity, and, robbed of their leader, they dared 
attempt nothing. 

Now the Prince of Mantivoglia, whom his 
army sought thus in fear and bewilderment, 
was carried very quickly up to the high gi-ound, 
where the rocks grew steep and close and the 
way led to the peak of Agnino. And as he 
was borne along, some one bound his hands 
and his feet; and still he was carried up, till 
at last he found himself laid down gently on 
the ground. And though he knew no fear — 
for they of Mantivoglia have ever been most 
valiant Princes and strangers to all fear — yet 
he thought that his last hour was come, and, 
fearing God though he feared nothing else, he 
said a prayer and commended his soul to the 
Almighty, grieving that he should not receive 
the last services of the Church. And having 
done this, he lay still until the dawning day 
smote on his eyes and he could see; for the 
fog that lay dense on the plain was not in the 
hills, but hung between them and the plain. 
And he looked round, but saw no man. So he 
abode another hour, and then he heard a step 
behind him, and a man came, but whence he 
could not see ; and the man stooped and loosed 
the scarf from his mouth and cut his bonds, 
95 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


and he sat up, uttering a cry of wonder. For 
Count Antonio stood before him, his sword 
sheathed by his side. And he said to the 
Prince of Mantivoglia, “ Do to me what you 
will, my lord. If you will strike me as I stand, 
strike. Or if you will do me the honour to 
cross swords, my sword is ready. Or, my 
lord, if you will depart in peace and in my 
great love and reverence, I will give thanks to 
Heaven and to a noble Prince.” 

“ Antonio, what does this mean ? ” cried 
the Prince, divided between anger and won- 
der. 

Then Antonio told him all that he had 
done : how the Duke was gone back with his 
army to Firmola, and how the Prince s army 
had retreated towards the borders of Manti- 
voglia ; for of all this his men had informed 
him ; and he ended, saying, “ For since it 
seemed that I was to be the most unworthy 
cause of more fighting between two great 
Princes, it came into my head that such a 
thing should not be. And I rejoice that now 
it will not ; for the townsmen will not march 
out again this year at least, and Your High- 
ness will scarce sit down before Firmola with 
the season now far gone.” 

“ So I am baulked ? ” cried the Prince, and 
96 


ANTONIO AND MANTIVOGLIA 


he rose to his feet. “ And this trick is played 
me by a friend ! ” 

“ I am of Firmola,” said Antonio, flushing 
red. “ And while there was war, I might in 
all honour have played another trick, and car- 
ried you not hither, but to Firmola.” 

“ I care not,” cried the Prince angrily. “ It 
was a trick, and no fair fighting.” 

“ Be it as you will, my lord,” said Antonio. 
“ A man’s own conscience is his only judge. 
Will you draw your sword, my lord ? ” 

But the Prince was very angry, and he an- 
swered roughly, “ I will not fight with you, 
and I will not speak more with you. I will 
go.” 

“ I will lead Your Highness to your horse,” 
said Antonio. 

Then he led him some hundreds of paces 
down the hill, and they came where a fine 
horse stood ready saddled. 

“ It is not my horse,” said the Prince. 

“ Be not afraid, my lord. It is not mine 
either,” said Antonio smihng. “ A rogue who 
serves me, and is called Bena, forgot his man- 
ners so far as to steal it from the quarters of 
the Duke. I pray you use some opportunity 
of sending it back to him, or I shall be dubbed 
horse-stealer with the rest.” 

97 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


“ I am glad it is not yours,” said the Prince, 
and he prepared to mount, Antonio holding 
the stirrup for him. And when he was 
mounted, Antonio told him how to ride, so 
that he should come safely to his own men, 
and avoid certain scouting parties of the Duke 
that he had thrown out behind him as he 
marched back to Firmola. And having done 
this, Antonio stood back and bared his head 
and bowed. 

“ And where is your horse ? ” asked the 
Prince suddenly. 

“ I have no horse, my lord,” said Antonio. 
“My men with all my horses have ridden 
back to our hiding-place in the hills. I am 
alone here, for I thought that Your High- 
ness would kill me, and I should need no 
horse.” 

“ How, then, will you escape the scouting 
parties ? ” 

“ I fear I shall not escape them, my lord,” 
said Antonio, smiling again. 

“ And if they take you ? ” 

“ Of a surety I shall be hanged,” said Count 
Antonio. 

The Prince of Mantivoglia gathered his 
brow into a heavy frown, but the corners of 
his lips twitched, and he did not look at An- 
98 


ANTONIO AND MANTIVOGLIA 


tonio. And thus they rested a few moments, 
till suddenly the Prince, unable to hold himself 
longer, burst into a great and merry peal of 
laughter ; and he raised his fist and shook it at 
Antonio, crying, “ A scurvy trick, Antonio ! 
By my faith, a scurvier trick by far than that 
other of yours 1 Art thou not ashamed, man ? 
Ah, you cast down your eyes 1 You dare not 
look at me, Antonio.” 

“ Indeed I have naught to say for this last 
trick, my lord,” said Antonio, laughing also. 

“ Indeed I must carry this knave with me !” 
cried the Prince. “ Faugh, the traitor ! Get 
up behind me, traitor ! Clasp me by the 
waist, knave 1 Closer, knave ! Ah, Antonio, 
I know not in what mood Heaven was when 
you were made ! I would I had the heart to 
leave you to your hanging ! For what a story 
will my Princess make of this ! I shall be the 
best-derided man in all Mantivoglia. ” 

“I think not, my dear lord,” said Count 
Antonio, “ unless a love that a man may 
reckon on as his lady-love’s, and a chivalry that 
does not fail, and a valour that has set two 
armies all agape in wonder, be your matters 
for mirth in Mantivoglia. And indeed, my 
lord, I would that I were riding to the lady I 
love best in the world, as Your Highness rides; 

99 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


for she might laugh till her sweet eyes ran 
tears so I were near to dry them.” 

The Prince put back his hand towards 
Antonio and clasped Antonio’s hand, and said, 
“ What said she when you left her, Antonio ? 
For with women love is often more than 
honour, and their tears rust the bright edge 
of a man’s conscience.” 

“ Her heart is even as Our Lady’s, and with 
tears and smiles she left me,” said Antonio, 
and he grasped the Prince’s hand. ‘‘Come, 
my lord, we must ride, or it is a prison for you 
and a halter for me.” 

So they rode together in the morning on 
the horse that Bena had stolen from among 
the choicest of Duke Valentine’s, and, keeping 
cunningly among the spurs of the hills, they 
were sighted once only from afar off by the 
Duke’s scouts, and escaped at a canter, and 
came safe to the Prince’s army, where they 
were received with great wonder and joy. 
But the Prince would not turn again to be- 
siege Firmola, for he had had a fill of fighting, 
and the season grew late for the siege of a 
walled town. So he returned with all his force 
to Mantivoglia, having won by his expedition 
much praise of valour, and nothing else in the 
wide world besides ; which thing indeed is so 
100 


ANTONIO AND MANTIVOGLIA 


common in the wars of princes, that even 
wise men have well-nigh ceased to wonder 
at it. 

But the Princess of Mantivoglia heard all 
that had passed with great mirth, and made 
many jests upon her husband ; and again, lest 
the Prince should take her jesting in evil part, 
more upon Duke Valentine. But concerning 
Count Antonio and the Lady Lucia she did 
not jest. Yet one day, chancing to be alone 
with Count Antonio — for he stayed many days 
at the Court of Mantivoglia, and was treated 
with great honour — she said to him, with a 
smile and half-raised eyehds, “ Had I been a 
man, my lord Antonio, I would not have re- 
turned alone from the gates of Firmola. In 
truth, your lady needs patience for her virtue, 
Count Antonio ! ” 

“ I trust, then, that Heaven sends it to her, 
madame,” said Antonio. 

“ And to you also,” she retorted with a 
laugh. “ And to her, trust in you also, I pray. 
For an absent lover is often an absent heart, 
Antonio, and I hear that many ladies would 
fain soften your exile. And what I hear, the 
Lady Lucia may hear also.” 

“ She would hear it as the idle babbling of 
water over stones,” said Antonio. “But, 
101 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


madame, I am glad that I have some honesty 
in me. For if there were not honest men and 
true maids in this world, I think more than a 
half of the wits would starve for lack of food.” 

“ Mercy, mercy ! ” she cried. “ Indeed your 
wit has a keen edge, my lord.” 

“ Yet it is not whetted on truth and hon- 
esty,” said he. 

She answered nothing for a moment ; then 
she drew near to him and stood before him, 
regarding his face; and she sighed ‘‘Heigh- 
ho ! ” and again “ Heigh-ho ! ” and dropped her 
eyes, and raised them again to his face ; and at 
last she said, “ To some faithfulness is easy. I 
give no great praise to the Lady Lucia.” And 
when she had said this she turned and left 
him, and was but little more in his company 
so long as he stayed at Mantivoglia. And she 
spoke no more of the Lady Lucia. But when 
he was mounting, after bidding her farewell, 
she gave him a white rose from her bosom, 
saying carelessly, “ Your colour, my lord, and 
the best. Yet God made the other roses 
also.” 

“All that He made He loves, and in all 
there is good,” said Antonio, and he bowed 
very low, and, having kissed her hand, took 
the rose; and he looked into her eyes and 
102 


ANTONIO AND MANTIVOGLIA 


smiled, saying, “ Heaven give peace where it 
has given wit and beauty ; ” and so he rode 
away to join his company in the hills. And 
the Princess of Mantivoglia, having watched 
till he was out of sight, went in to dinner, and 
was merrier than ever she had shown herself 
before ; so that they said, ‘‘ She feared Anto- 
nio and is glad that he is gone.” Yet that 
night, while her husband slept, she wept. 


103 


CHAPTER IV 


COUNT ANTONIO AND THE WIZARD’S DRUG 

The opinion of man is ever in flux save where 
it is founded on the rock of true religion. 
What our fathers believed, we disbelieve; but 
often our sons shall again receive it. In olden 
time men held much by magic and black arts ; 
now such are less esteemed ; yet hereafter it 
may well be that the world will find new in- 
cantations and fresh spells, the same impulse 
flowing in a different channel and never ut- 
terly to be checked or stemmed by the cen- 
sures of the Church or the mocking of unbe- 
hevers. As for truth — in truth who knows 
truth? For the light of Revelation shines 
but in few places, and for the rest we are in 
natural darkness, groping along unseen paths 
towards unknown ends. May God keep our 
footsteps ! 

Now towards the close of the third year of 
his outlawry the heart of Count Antonio of 
Monte Velluto had grown very sad. For it 
was above the space of a year since he had 
heard news of the Lady Lucia, and hard upon 
104 


ANTONIO AND THE WIZARD 


two since he had seen her face ; so closely did 
Duke Valentine hold her prisoner in Firmola. 
And as he walked to and fro among his men 
in their hiding place in the hills, his face was 
sorrowful. Yet, coming where Tommasino 
and Bena sat together, he stopped and listened 
to their talk with a smile. For Bena cried to 
Tommasino, “By the saints, my lord, it is 
even so! My father himself had a philtre 
from him thirty years ago ; and though, be- 
fore, my mother had loathed to look on my 
father, yet now here am I, nine-and-twenty 
years of age and a child born in holy wed- 
lock. Never tell me that it is foolishness, my 
lord!” 

“ Of whom do you speak, Bena? ” asked 
Antonio. 

‘‘ Of the Wizard of Baratesta, my lord. 
Ay, and he can do more than make a love- 
’ potion. He can show you all that shall come 
to you in a mirror, and make the girl you love 
rise before your eyes as though the shape were 
good flesh and blood.” 

“ All this is foolishness, Bena,” said Count 
Antonio. 

‘ ‘ W ell, God knows that,” said Bena. “ But 
he did it for my father; and as he is thirty 
years older, he will be wiser still by now;” 

105 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


and Bena strode off to tend his horse, some- 
what angry that Antonio paid so httle heed to 
his words. 

“It is all foolishness, Tommasino,” said 
Antonio. 

‘‘ They say that of many a thing which 
gives a man pleasure,” said Tommasino. 

“ I have heard of this man before,” continued 
the Count, “ and marvellous stories are told of 
him. Now I leave what shall come to me in 
the hands of Heaven ; for to know is not to 
alter, and knowledge without power is but 
fretting of the heart; but ” And Anto- 

nio broke off. 

“ Ride then, if you can safely, and beg him 
to show you Lucia’s face,” said Tommasino. 
“ For to that I think you are making.” 

“In truth I was, fool that I am,” said 
Antonio. 

“ But be wary ; for Baratesta is but ten 
miles from the city, and His Highness sleeps 
with an open eye.” 

So Antonio, albeit that he was in part 
ashamed, learnt from Bena where the wizard 
dwelt on the bridge that is outside the gate of 
Baratesta — for the Syndic would not suffer 
such folk to live inside the wall — and one 
evening he saddled his horse and rode alone 
106 


ANTONIO AND THE WIZARD 


to seek the wizard, leaving Tommasino in 
charge of the band. And as he went, he pon- 
dered, saying, ‘‘ I am a fool, yet I would see 
her face ; ” and thus, still dubbing himself fool, 
yet still persisting, he came to the bridge of 
Baratesta; and the wizard, who was a very 
old man and tall and marvellously lean, met 
him at the door of the house, crying, “ I 
looked for your coming, my lord. ’ ’ And he 
took Antonio’s horse from him and stood it in 
a stable beside the house, and led Antonio in, 
saying again, “Your coming was known to 
me, my lord ; ” and he brought Antonio to a 
chamber at the back of the house, having one 
window, past which the river, being then in 
flood, rushed with noise and fury. There 
were many strange things in the chamber, 
skulls and the forms of animals from far-off 
countries, great jars, basins, and retorts, and in 
one corner a mirror half-draped in a black cloth. 

“ You know who I am ? ” asked Antonio. 

“ That needs no art,” answered the wizard, 
“ and I pretend to none in it. Your face, my 
lord, was known to me as to any other man, 
from seeing you ride with the Duke before 
your banishment.” 

“ And you knew that I rode hither to- 
night ? ” 


107 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


“ Ay,” said the wizard. “ For the stars told 
of the coming of some great man ; and I turned 
from my toil and watched for you.” 

“ What toil ? ” asked Antonio. ‘‘ See, here 
is money, and I have a quiet tongue. What 
toil ? ” 

The wizard pointed to a heap of broken and 
bent pieces of base metal. “ I was turning 
dross to gold,” said he, in a fearful whisper. 

“ Can you do that ? ” asked Antonio, smiling. 

“ I can, my lord, though but slowly.” 

‘‘ And hate to love ? ” asked Count Antonio. 

The wizard laughed harshly. “ Let them 
that prize love, seek that,” said he. “ It is not 
for me.” 

“ I would it had been ; then had my errand 
here been a better one. For I am come but to 
see the semblance of a maiden s face.” 

The wizard frowned as he said, “ I had 
looked for a greater matter. For you have a 
mighty enemy, my lord, and I have means of 
power for freeing men of their enemies.” 

But Count Antonio, knowing that he spoke 
of some dark device of spell or poison, an- 
swered, ‘‘ Enough ! enough ! For I am a man 
of quick temper, and it is not well to tell me of 
wicked things, lest I be tempted to anticipate 
Heaven’s punishment.” 

108 


ANTONIO AND THE WIZARD 


“ I shall not die at your hands, my lord,” 
said the wizard. “ Come, will you see what 
shall befall you ? ” 

‘‘Nay, I would but see my lady’s face; a 
great yearning for that has come over me, and, 
although I take shame in it, yet it has brought 
me here.” 

“ You shall see it, then ; and if you see more, 
it is not by my will,” said the wizard ; and he 
quenched the lamp that burned on the table, 
and flung a handful of some powder on the 
charcoal in the stove ; and the room was fllled 
with a thick sweet-smelling vapour. And the 
wizard tore the black cloth off the face of the 
mirror and bade Antonio look steadily in the 
mirror. Antonio looked till the vapour that 
enveloped all the room cleared off from the face 
of the mirror, and the wizard, laying his hand 
on Antonio’s shoulder, said, “ Cry her name 
thrice.” And Antonio thrice cried “ Lucia ! ” 
and again waited. Then something came on 
the polished surface of the mirror; but the 
wizard muttered low and angrily, for it was not 
the form of Lucia nor of any maiden ; yet pres- 
ently he cried low, “ Look, my lord, look ! ” 
and Antonio, looking, saw a dim and shadowy 
face in the mirror ; and the wizard began to 
fling his body to and fro, uttering strange whis- 
8 109 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


pered words ; and the sweat stood in beads on 
his forehead. “ Now, now ! ” he cried ; and 
Antonio, with beating heart, fastened his gaze 
on the mirror. And as the story goes (I vouch 
not for it) he saw, though very dimly, the face 
of Lucia ; but more he saw also ; for beside the 
face was his own face, and there was a rope 
about his neck, and the half- shaped arm of a 
gibbet seemed to hover above him. And he 
shrank back for an instant. 

‘‘ What more you see is not by my will,” 
said the wizard. 

“ What shall come is only by God’s will,” 
said Antonio. ‘‘ I have seen her face. It is 
f^nough.” 

But the wizard clutched him by the arm, 
whispering in terror, “ It is a gibbet; and the 
rope is about your neck.” 

“ Indeed, I seem to have worn it there these 
three years, and it is not drawn tight yet ; nor 
is it drawn in the mirror.” 

“ You have a good courage,” said the wizard 
with a grim smile. “ I will show you more ; ” 
and he flung another powder on the charcoal ; 
and the shapes passed from the mirror. But 
another came ; and the wizard, with a great 
cry, fell suddenly on his knees, exclaiming, 
“ They mock me, they mock me 1 They show 
110 


ANTONIO AND THE WIZARD 


what they will, not what I will. Ah, my lord, 
whose is the face in the mirror ? ” And he 
seized Antonio again by the arm. 

“ It is your face,” said Antonio ; “ and it is 
the face of a dead man, for his jaw has dropped, 
and his features are drawn and wrung.” 

The wizard buried his face in his hands ; 
and so they rested awhile till the glass of the 
mirror cleared ; and Antonio felt the body of 
the wizard shaking against his knee. 

“You are old,” said Antonio, “and death 
must come to all. Maybe it is a lie of the 
devil ; but if not, face it as a man should.” 

But the wizard trembled still ; and Antonio, 
casting a pitiful glance on him, rose to depart. 
But on the instant as he moved, there came a 
sudden loud knocking at the door of the house, 
and he stood still. The wizard lifted his head 
to listen. 

“ Have you had warning of more visitors to- 
night ? ” asked Antonio. 

“ I know not what happens to-night,” mut- 
tered the wizard. “My power is gone to- 
night.” 

The knocking at the door came again, loud 
and impatient. 

“ They will beat the door down if you do not 
open,” said Antonio. “ I will hide myself here 
111 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


behind the mirror ; for I cannot pass them 
without being seen ; and if I am seen here, it 
is like enough that the mirror will be proved 
right both for you and me.” 

So Antonio hid himself, crouching down be- 
hind the mirror ; and the wizard, having lit a 
small dim lamp, went on trembling feet to the 
door. And presently he came back, followed 
by two men whose faces were hid in their 
cloaks. One of them sat down, but the other 
stood and flung his cloak back over his shoul- 
ders ; and Antonio, observing him from behind 
the mirror, saw that he was Lorenzo, the Duke’s 
favourite. 

Then Lorenzo spoke to the wizard saying, 
“ Why did you not come sooner to open the 
door ? ” 

“ There was one here with me, ” said the 
wizard, whose air had become again composed. 

“ And is he gone ? For we would be alone.” 

“ He is not to be seen, ’ ’ answered the wiz- 
ard. “ Utterly alone here you cannot be.” 

When he heard this, Lorenzo turned pale, 
for he did not love this midnight errand to 
the wizard’s chamber. 

“ But no man is here,” said the wizard. 

A low hoarse laugh came from the man who 
sat. “ Tricks of the trade, tricks of the trade!” 

112 


ANTONIO AND THE WIZARD 


said he ; and Antonio started to hear his voice. 
“ Be sure that where a prince, a courtier, and 
a cheat are together, the devil makes a fourth. 
But there is no need to turn pale over it, 
Lorenzo.” 

When the wizard heard, he fell on his knees ; 
for he knew that it was Duke Valentine who 
spoke. 

“ Look you, fellow,” pursued His Highness, 
“ you owe me much thanks that you are not 
hanged already ; for by putting an end to you 
I should please my clergy much and the Syn- 
dic of Baratesta not a little. But if you do 
not obey me to-night, you shall be dead be- 
fore morning.” 

“ I shall not die unless it be written in the 
stars,” said the wizard, but his voice trembled. 

“ I know nothing of the stars,” said the 
Duke, “ but I know the mind of the Duke of 
Firmola, and that is enough for my purpose.” 
And he rose and began to walk about the 
chamber, examining the strange objects that 
were there ; and thus he came in front of the 
mirror, and stood within half a yard of Antonio. 
But Lorenzo stood where he was, and once he 
crossed himself secretly and unobserved. 

“ What would my lord the Duke ? ” asked 
the wizard. 


113 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


“ There is a certain drug,” said the Duke, 
turning round towards the wizard, “ which if a 
man drink — or a woman, Lorenzo — he can 
walk on his legs and use his arms, and seem to 
be waking and in his right mind ; yet is his 
mind a nothing, for he knows not what he 
does, but does everything that one, being with 
him, may command, and without seeming re- 
luctance; and again, when bidden, he will 
seem to lose all power of movement, and to 
lack his senses. I saw the thing once when 
I sojourned with the Lord of Florence; for a 
wizard there, having given the drug to a cer- 
tain man, put him through strange antics, and 
he performed them all willingly.” 

“ Ay, there is such a drug,” said the wizard. 

“Then give it me,” said the Duke; “and 
I give you your life and fifty pieces of gold. 
For I have great need of it.” 

Now when Antonio heard the Duke’s words, 
he was seized with great fear; for he surmised 
that it was against Lucia that the Duke 
meant to use this drug; and noiselessly he 
loosened his sword in its sheath and bent for- 
ward again to listen. 

“And though my purpose is nothing to 
you, yet it is a benevolent purpose. Is it not, 
Lorenzo ? ” 


114 


ANTONIO AND THE WIZARD 


“ It is your will, not mine, my lord,” said 
Lorenzo in a troubled voice. 

Mine shall be the crime, then, and yours 
the reward,” laughed the Duke. “ For I will 
give her the drug, and she shall wed you.” 

Then Antonio doubted no longer of what 
was afoot, nor that a plot was laid whereby 
Lucia should be entrapped into marriage with 
Lorenzo, since she could not be openly forced. 
And anger burned hotly in him. And he 
swore that, sooner than suffer the thing to be 
done, he would kill the Duke there with his 
own hand or himself be slain. 

“ And you alone know of this drug now, 
they say,” the Duke went on. “ For the wiz- 
ard of Florence is dead. Therefore give it me 
quickly.” 

But the wizard answered, “ It will not serve, 
my lord, that I give you the drug. With my 
own hand I must give it to the persons whom 
you would thus affect, and I must tell them 
what they should do.” 

“ More tricks ! ” said the Duke scornfully. 
“ I know your ways. Give me the drug.” And 
he would not believe what the wizard said. 

“ It is even as I say,” said the wizard. “And 
if Your Highness will carry the drug yourself, 
I will not vouch its operation.” 

115 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


“ Give it me ; for I know the appearance of 
it,” said the Duke. 

Then the wizard, having again protested, 
went to a certain shelf and from some hidden 
recess took a small phial, and came with it to 
the Duke, saying, “ Blame me not, if its oper- 
ation fail.” 

The Duke examined the phial closely, and 
also smelt its smell. “ It is the same,” said 
he. “ It will do its work.” 

Then Count Antonio, who beUeved no more 
than the Duke what the wizard had said con- 
cerning the need of his own presence for the 
working of the drug, was very sorely put to it 
to stay quietly where he was ; for if the Duke 
rode away now with the phial, he might well 
find means to give it to the Lady Lucia before 
any warning could be conveyed to her. And, 
although the danger was great, yet his love for 
Lucia and his fear for her overcame his pru- 
dence, and suddenly he sprang from behind 
the mirror, drawing his sword and crying, 
“ Give me that drug, my lord, or your life 
must answer for it.” 

But fortune served him ill ; for as the Duke 
and Lorenzo shrank back at his sudden appear- 
ance, and he was about to spring on them, be- 
hold, his foot caught in the folds of the black 
116 


ANTONIO AND THE WIZARD 

cloth that had been over the mirror and now 
lay on the ground, and, falling forward, he 
struck his head on the marble rim that ran 
round the charcoal stove, and, having fallen 
with great force, lay there like a man dead. 
With loud cries of triumph, the Duke and 
Lorenzo, having drawn their swords, ran upon 
him ; and the Duke planted his foot upon his 
neck, crying, “ Heaven sends a greater prize ! 
At last, at last I have him 1 Bind his hands, 
Lorenzo.” 

Lorenzo bound Antonio’s hands as he lay 
there, a log for stillness. The Duke turned to 
the wizard and a smile bent his lips. “ O faith- 
ful subject and servant ! ” said he. “ Well do 
you requite my mercy and forbearance, by 
harbouring my bitterest enemies and suffering 
them to hear my secret counsels. Had not 
Antonio chanced to trip, it is like enough he 
would have slain Lorenzo and me also. What 
shall be your reward, O faithful servant ? ” 

When the Wizard of Baratesta beheld the 
look that was on Duke Valentine’s face, he 
suddenly cried aloud, “The mirror, the mirror! ” 
and sank in a heap on the floor, trembling in 
every hmb ; for he remembered the aspect of 
his own face in the mirror and knew that the 
hour of his death had come. And he feared 
117 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


mightily to die ; therefore he besought the 
Duke very piteously, and told him again that 
from his hand alone could the drug receive its 
potency. And so earnest was he in this, that 
at last he half- won upon the Duke, so that the 
Duke wavered. And as he doubted, his eye 
fell on Antonio ; and he perceived that An- 
tonio was recovering from his swoon. 

“ There is enough for two,” said he, “ in the 
phial; and we will put this thing to the test. 
But if you speak or move or make any sign, 
forthwith in that moment you shall die.” Then 
the Duke poured half the contents of the phial 
into a glass and came to Lorenzo and whis- 
pered to him, If the drug works on him, and 
the wizard is proved to lie, the wizard shall 
die ; but we will carry Antonio with us ; and 
when I have mustered my Guard, I will hang 
him in the square as I have sworn. But if the 
drug does not work, then we must kill him 
here ; for I fear to carry him against his will ; 
for he is a wonderful man, full of resource, and 
the people also love him. Therefore, if the 
operation of the drug fail, run him through 
with your sword when I give the signal.” 

Now Antonio was recovering from his swoon, 
and he overheard part of what the Duke said, 
but not aU. As to the death of the wizard he 
118 


ANTONIO AND THE WIZARD 


did not hear, but he understood that the Duke 
was about to test the effect of the drug on 
him, and that if it had no effect, he was to 
die ; whereas, if its operation proved sufficient, 
he should go alive ; and he saw here a chance 
for his life in case what the wizard had said 
should prove true. 

“Drink, Antonio,” said the Duke softly. 
“No harm comes to you. Drink : it is a re- 
freshing draught.” 

And Antonio drank the draught, the wizard 
looking on with parted lips and with great 
drops of sweat running from his forehead and 
thence down his cheeks to his mouth, so that 
his lips were salt when he licked them. And 
the Duke, having seen that Lorenzo had his 
sword ready for Antonio, took his stand by 
the wizard with the dagger from his belt in his 
hand. And he cried to Antonio, “Rise.” 
And Antonio rose up. The wizard started a 
step towards him ; but the Duke showed his 
dagger, and said to Antonio, “Will you go 
with me to Firmola, Antonio ? ” 

And Antonio answered, “ I will go.” 

“Do you love me, Antonio?” asked the Duke. 

“Ay, my lord,” answered Antonio. 

“Yet you have done many wicked things 
against me.” 


119 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


“ True, my lord,” said Antonio. 

“ Is your mind then changed ? ” 

“ It is, my lord,” said Antonio. 

“ Then leap two paces into the air,” said the 
Duke ; and Antonio straightway obeyed. 

“Go down on your knees and crawl;” and 
Antonio crawled, smihng secretly to himself. 

Then the Duke bade Lorenzo mount An- 
tonio on his horse ; and he commanded the 
wizard to foUow him ; and they all went out 
where the horses were ; and the three mounted, 
and the wizard followed; and they came to 
the end of the bridge. There the Duke 
turned sharp round and rode by the side of the 
rushing river. And, suddenly pausing, he said 
to Antonio, “ Commend thy soul to God and 
leap in.” 

And Antonio commended his soul to God, 
and would have leapt in ; but the Duke caught 
him by the arm even as he set spurs to his 
horse, saying, “ Do not leap.” And Antonio 
stayed his leap. Then the Duke turned his 
face on the wizard, saying, “ The potion works, 
wizard. Why did you lie? ” 

Then the wizard fell on his knees, cursing 
hell and heaven ; for he could not see how he 
should escape. For the potion worked. And 
Antonio wondered what should fall out next. 

120 


ANTONIO AND THE WIZARD 


But Duke Valentine leapt down from his horse 
and approached the wizard, while Lorenzo set 
his sword against Antonio’s breast. And the 
Duke, desirous to make a final trial, cried again 
to Antonio, “ FUng yourself from your horse.” 
And Antonio, having his arms bound, yet 
flung himself from his horse, and feU prone on 
the ground, and lay there sorely bruised. 

“ It is enough,” said the Duke. “ You lied, 
wizard.” 

But the wizard cried, “ I lied not, I lied not, 
my lord. Slay me not, my lord ! For I dare 
not die.” 

But the Duke caught him by the throat and 
drove his dagger into his breast till the fingers 
that held the dagger were buried in the folds 
of the wizard’s doublet; and the Duke pulled 
out the dagger, and, when the wizard fell, he 
pushed him with his foot over the brink, and 
the body fell with a loud splash into the river 
below. 

Thus died the Wizard of Baratesta, who was 
famed above all of his day for the hidden 
knowledge that he had; yet he served not 
God, but Satan, and his end was the end of a 
sinner. And, many days after, his body was 
found a hundred miles from that place ; and 
certain charitable men, brethren of my own 
121 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


order, gave it burial. So that he died that 
same night in which the mirror had shown him 
his face as the face of a dead man ; but whence 
came the vision I know not. 

Then the Duke set Antonio again on his 
horse, and the three rode together towards 
Firmola, and as they went, again and again the 
Duke tested the operation of the drug, setting 
Antonio many strange, ludicrous, and un- 
seemly things to do and to say ; and Antonio 
did and said them all. But he wondered 
greatly that the drug had no power over him, 
and that his brain was clear and his senses all 
his own ; nor did he then believe that the 
Duke had, in truth, slain the wizard for any 
reason save that the wizard had harboured him, 
an outlaw, and suffered him to hear the Duke’s 
counsels : and he was grieved at the wizard’s 
death. 

Thus they rode through the night ; and it 
was the hour of dawn when they came to the 
gates of Firmola. Now Antonio was puzzled 
what he should do ; for, having been in a 
swoon, he knew not whether the Duke had 
more of the potion ; nor could he tell with cer- 
tainty whether the potion would be powerless 
against the senses of a weak girl as it had 
proved against his own. Therefore he said to 
122 


ANTONIO AND THE WIZARD 


the Duke, “ I pray you, my lord, give me 
more of that sweet drink. For it has refreshed 
me and set my mind at rest from all trouble.” 

“Nay, Antonio, you have had enough,” 
said the Duke, bantering him. “ I have an- 
other use for the rest.” And they were now 
nearing the gates of Firmola. Then Antonio 
began to moan pitifully, saying, “ These bonds 
hurt my hands ; ” and he whined and did as a 
child would do, feigning to cry. The Duke 
laughed in bitter triumph, saying to Lorenzo, 
“ Indeed it is a princely drug that makes An- 
tonio of Monte V elluto like a peevish child ! ” 
And being now very secure of the power of 
the drug, he bade Lorenzo loosen the bonds, 
saying to Antonio, ‘ ‘ Take the reins, Antonio, 
and ride with us into the city.” 

And Antonio answered, “I will, my good 
lord.” 

“ It is even as I saw when I was with the 
Lord of Florence,” whispered the Duke in 
exultation. 

“Yet I will still have my sword ready,” 
said Lorenzo. 

‘ ‘ There is no need ; he is like a tame dog,” 
said the Duke carelessly. 

But the Duke was not minded to produce 
Antonio to the people till all his Guards were 
123 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


collected and under arms, and the people thus 
restrained by a great show of force. There- 
fore he bade Antonio cover his face with his 
cloak; and Antonio, Lorenzo’s sword being 
still at his breast, obeyed ; and thus they three 
rode through the gates of Firmola and came 
to the Duke’s Palace ; and Antonio did all 
that the Duke ordered, and babbled foolishly 
like a bewildered child when the Duke asked 
him questions, so that His Highness laughed 
mightily, and, coming into the garden, sat down 
in his favourite place by the fish-pond, causing 
Antonio to stand over against him. 

‘‘ Indeed, Antonio,” said he, “ I can do no 
other than hang you.” 

“ If it be your pleasure, my lord.” 

“ And then Lucia shall drink of this wonder- 
ful drug also, and she will be content and 
obedient, and will gladly wed Lorenzo. Let 
us have her here now, and give it to her with- 
out delay. You do not fret at that, Antonio? 
You love not the obstinate girl ? ” 

“In truth, no,” laughed Antonio. “ She is 
naught to me ! ” And he put his hand to his 
head, saying perplexedly, “Lucia? Yes, I 
remember that name. Who was she ? Was 
she aught to me, my lord ? ” 

Then Lorenzo wondered greatly, and the 
124 


ANTONIO AND THE WIZARD 


doubts that he had held concerning the power 
of the wizard s drug melted away ; yet he did 
not laugh like the Duke, but looked on An- 
tonio and said sadly to the Duke, sinking his 
voice, “Not thus should Antonio of Monte 
Velluto have died.” 

“ So he dies, I care not how,” answered the 
Duke. “Indeed, I love to see him a witless 
fool even while his body is yet alive. O rare 
wizard, I go near to repenting having done 
justice on you ! Go, Lorenzo, to the officer of 
the Guard and bid him fetch hither the Lady 
Lucia, and we will play the pretty comedy to 
the end.” 

“ Will you be alone with him ? ” asked Lo- 
renzo. 

“Ay; why not? See! he is tame enough,” 
and he buffeted Antonio in the face with his 
riding-glove. And Antonio whimpered and 
whined. 

Now the officer of the Guard was in his 
lodge at the entrance of the Palace, on the 
other side of the great hall; and Lorenzo 
turned and went, and presently the sound of 
his feet on the marble floor of the hall grew 
faint and distant. The Duke sat with the 
phial in his hand, smiling at Antonio who 
crouched at his feet. And Antonio drew him- 
9 125 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 

self on his knees quite close to the Duke, 
and looked up in his face with a foolish empty 
smile. And the Duke, laughing, buffeted 
him again. Then, with a sudden spring, like 
the spring of that Indian tiger which the Mo- 
gul of Delhi sent lately as a gift to the Most 
Christian King, and the king, for his diversion, 
made to slay deer before him at the chateau of 
Blois (which I myself saw, being there on a 
certain mission, and wonderful was the sight). 
Count Antonio, leaping, was upon the Duke; 
and he snatched the philtre from the Duke’s 
hand and seized the Duke’s head in his hands 
and wrenched his jaw open, and he poured 
the contents of the phial down the Duke’s 
throat, and the Duke swallowed the potion. 
Then Antonio fixed a stern and imperious 
glance on the Duke, nailing his eyes to the 
Duke’s and the Duke’s to his, and he said 
in a voice of command, “Obey! You have 
drunk the potion 1 ” And still he kept his 
eyes on the Duke’s. And the Duke, amazed, 
suddenly began to tremble, and sought to rise ; 
and Antonio took his hands off him, but said, 
“ Sit there, and move not.” Then, although 
Antonio’s hands were no longer upon him, 
yet His Highness did not rise, but after a short 
struggle with himself sank back in his seat, 
126 


ANTONIO AND THE WIZARD 


and stared at Antonio like a bird fascinated 
by a snake. And he moaned, “Take away 
your eyes ; they burn my brain. Take them 
away.” But Antonio gazed all the more in- 
tently at him, saying, “ Be still, be still ! ” and 
holding up his arm in enforcement of his com- 
mand. And Antonio took from the Duke 
the sword that he wore and the dagger where- 
with he had killed the Wizard of Baratesta, 
the Duke making no resistance, but sitting 
motionless with bewildered stare. Then Anto- 
nio looked round, for he knew that Lorenzo 
would soon come. And for the last time he 
bent his eyes again on the Duke’s eyes in a 
very long gaze, and the Duke cowered and 
shivered, moaning, “You hurt me, you hurt 
me.” 

Then Antonio said, “ Be still and speak not 
till I return and bid you ; ” and he suddenly 
left the Duke and ran at the top of his speed 
along under the wall of the garden, and came 
where the wall ended ; and there was a flight 
of steps leading up onto the top of the wall. 
Running up it, Antonio stood for a moment 
on the wall ; and the river ran fifty feet below. 
But he heard a cry from the garden, and be- 
held Lorenzo rushing up to the Duke, and, be- 
hind Lorenzo, the Captain of the Guard and 
127 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


two men who led a maiden in white. Then 
Count Antonio, having commended himself to 
the keeping of God, leapt head foremost from 
the top of the wall into the river, and his body 
clove the water as an arrow cleaves the wand. 

Now Lorenzo marvelled greatly at what he 
saw, and came to the Duke crying, “ My lord, 
what does this mean ? Antonio flies ! ” But 
the Duke answered nothing, sitting with empty 
eyes and lips set in a rigid smile ; nor did he 
move. “ My lord, what ails you ? ” cried Lo- 
renzo. Yet the Duke did not answer. Then 
Lorenzo’s eye fell on the fragments of the phial 
which lay broken on the rim of the fish-pond 
where Antonio had flung it ; and he cried out 
in great alarm, “ The potion ! Where is the 
potion ? ” But the Duke did not answer. And 
Lorenzo was much bewildered and in sore fear ; 
for it seemed as though His Highness’s senses 
were gone ; and Lorenzo said, “ By some means 
he has drunk the potion ! ” And he ran up to 
the Duke, and caught him by the arm and 
shook him violently, seeking to rouse him from 
his stupor, and calling his name with entreaties, 
and crying, “ He escapes, my lord ; Antonio es- 
capes ! Rouse yourself, my lord — he escapes ! ” 
But the Duke did no more than lift heavy dull 
eyes to Lorenzo’s face in puzzled inquiry. 

1^8 


ANTONIO AND THE WIZARD 


And, seeing the strange thing, the Captain of 
the Guard hurried up, and with him the Lady 
Lucia, and she said, “ Alas, my lord is ill ! ” and 
coming to His Highness she set her cool soft 
hand on his hot throbbing brow, and took per- 
fume from a silver flask that hung at her girdle, 
and wetted her handkerchief with it and bathed 
his brow, whispering soft soothing words to 
him, as though he had been a sick woman. For 
let a woman have what grudge she may against 
a man, yet he gains pardon for all so soon as 
he becomes sick enough to let her nurse and 
comfort him ; and Lucia was as tender to the 
Duke as to the Count Antonio himself, and 
forgot all save the need of giving him ease and 
rousing him from his stupor. 

But Lorenzo cried angrily, ‘‘ I at least have 
my senses ! ’ ’ And he said to the Captain of 
the Guard, “ I must needs stay with His High- 
ness ; but Antonio of Monte Velluto has leapt 
from the wall into the river. Go and bring him 
here, dead or alive, and I will be your warrant 
to the Duke. But if he be as when I saw him 
last, he will give you small trouble. For he 
was hke a child for weakness and folly. ” And 
having said this, he turned to the Duke again, 
and gave his aid to Lucia’s ministrations. 

Now the gentleman who commanded the 
129 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


Duke’s Guard at this time was a Spaniard, by 
name Corogna, and he was young, of high cour- 
age, and burning to do some great deed. There- 
fore he said, “ I pray he be as he is wont to 
be : yet I will bring him to the feet of my lord 
the Duke.” And he ran swiftly through the 
haU and called for his horse, and drawing his 
sword rode alone out of the city and across 
the bridge, seeking Antonio, and saying to him- 
self, “ What a thing if I take him ! And if he 
slay me, why, I will show that a gentleman of 
Andalusia can die ; ” yet he thought for an 
instant of the house where his mother lived. 
Then he scanned the plain, and he beheld a 
man running some half-mile away; and the 
man seemed to be making for the hill on which 
stood the ruins of Antonio’s house that the 
Duke had burnt. Then Corogna set spurs to 
his horse; but the man, whom by his stature 
and gait Corogna knew to be Antonio, ran very 
swiftly, and was not overtaken before he came 
to the hill ; and he began to mount by a very 
steep rugged path, and he was out of sight in 
the trees when Corogna came to the foot. And 
Corogna’s horse stumbled among the stones, 
and could not mount the path; so Corogna 
sprang off his back and ran on foot up the 
path, sword in hand. And he came in sight 


ANTONIO AND THE WIZARD 


of Antonio round a curve of the path, three 
parts of the way up the hill. Antonio was 
leaning against the trunk of a tree and wring- 
ing the water out of his cloak. Corogna drew 
near, sword in hand, and with a prayer to the 
Holy Virgin on his lips. And he trembled, 
not with fear, but because fate offered a great 
prize, and his name would be famed through- 
out Italy if he slew or took Antonio of Monte 
Velluto ; and for fame, even as for a woman’s 
smile, a young man will tremble as a coward 
quakes with fear. 

The Count Antonio stood as though sunk 
in a reverie ; yet, presently, hearing Corogna’s 
tread, he raised his eyes, and smiling kindly on 
the young man he said, “Very strange are the 
ways of Heaven, sir. I think that the Wizard 
of Baratesta spoke truth, and did not lie to the 
Duke. Yet I had that same power which the 
wizard claimed, although the Duke had none 
over me. We are children, sir, and our game 
is blind-man’s buff ; but all are blinded, and it 
is but the narrowest glimpse that we obtain 
now and again by some clever shifting of the 
handkerchief. Yet there are some things clear 
enough; as that a man should do his work, 
and be clean and true. What would you with 
me, sir? For I do not think I know you.” 

131 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


“ I am of Andalusia, and my name is Corog- 
na. I am Captain of His Highness’s Guard, 
and I come to bring you, alive or dead, to his 
presence.” 

“ And are you come alone on that errand, 
sir?” asked Antonio with a smile that he 
strove to smother, lest it should wound the 
young man’s honour. 

“David slew Goliath, my lord,” said the 
Spaniard with a bow. 

Then Count Antonio held out his hand to 
the young man and said courteously, “ Sir, 
your valour needs no proof and fears no re- 
proach. I pray you suffer me to go in peace. 
I would not fight with you, if I may avoid it 
honourably. For what has happened has left 
me more in the mood for thinking than for 
fighting. Besides, sir, you are young, and, 
far off in Andalusia, loving eyes, and maybe 
sparkling eyes, are strained to the horizon, 
seeking your face as you return. ” 

“What is all that, my lord?” asked Corog- 
na. “ I am a man, though a young one ; and 
I am here to carry you to the Duke.” And 
he touched Antonio’s sword with his, saying, 
“ Guard yourself.” 

“ It is with great pain and reluctance that I 
take my sword, and I call you to witness of it; 

132 


ANTONIO AND THE WIZARD 


but if I must, I must ; ” and the Count took 
up his position and they crossed swords. 

Now Corogna was well-taught and skilful, 
but he did not know the cunning which An- 
tonio had learned in the school of Giacomo in 
Padua, nor had he the strength and endurance 
of the Count. Antonio would fain have wear- 
ied him out, and then, giving him some slight 
wound to cover his honour, have left him and 
escaped ; but the young man came at him im- 
petuously, and neglected to guard himself 
while he thrust at his enemy : once and again 
the Count spared him ; but he did not know 
that he had received the courtesy, and taking 
heart from his immunity came at Antonio 
more fiercely again; until at last Antonio, 
breathing a sigh, stiffened his arm, and, wait- 
ing warily for the young man again to uncover 
himself, thrust at his breast, and the sword’s 
point entered hard by the young man’s heart ; 
and the young man staggered, and would have 
fallen, dropping his sword; but Antonio cast 
away his own sword and supported him, 
stanching the blood from the wound and cry- 
ing, “ God send I have not killed him ! ” 

And on his speech came the voice of Tom- 
masino, saying carelessly, “Here, in truth, cous- 
in, is a good prayer wasted on a Spaniard ! ” 

133 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


Antonio, looking up, saw Tommasino and 
Bena. And Tommasino said, “ When you 
did not come back, we set out to seek you, 
fearing that you were fallen into some snare 
and danger. And behold, we find you nurs- 
ing this young spark ; and how you missed 
his heart, Antonio, I know not, nor what 
Giacomo of Padua would say to such bung- 
ling.” 

But Antonio cared not for his cousin’s 
words, which were spoken in a banter that a 
man uses to hide his true feelings; and they 
three set themselves to save the young man’s 
life ; for Tommasino and Bena had seen the 
better part of the fight and perceived that he 
was a gallant youth. But as they tended him, 
there came shouts and the sound of horses’ 
hoofs mounting the hill by the winding road 
that led past Antonio’s house. And Tomma- 
sino touched Antonio on the shoulder, saying, 
“We can do no more for him ; and if we lin- 
ger, we must fight again.” 

Then they laid the young man down, Anto- 
nio stripping off his cloak and making a pillow 
of it ; and Bena brought the horses, for they 
had led one with them for Antonio, in case 
there should be need of it ; and they were but 
just mounted when twenty of the Duke’s 
134 


ANTONIO AND THE WIZARD 


Guard appeared three hundred yards away, 
ascending the crest of the hill. 

“ Thank Heaven there are so many,” said 
Antonio, “ for now we can flee without 
shame ; ” and they set spurs to their horses 
and fled. And certain of the Duke’s Guard 
pursued, but only two or three were so well 
mounted as to be able to come near them; 
and these two or three, finding that they 
would be man to man, had no liking for the 
business, and each called out that his horse 
was foundered ; and thus it was that none of 
them came up with Count Antonio, but all, 
after a while, returned together to the city, 
carrying the young Spaniard Corogna, their 
captain. But as they drew near to the gates, 
Corogna opened his eyes and murmured some 
soft-syllabled name that they could not hear, 
and, having with failing fingers signed the 
cross, turned on his side and died. And they 
brought his body to the great hall of the 
Duke’s Palace. 

There in the great hall sat Duke Valentine : 
his face was pale and his frown heavy, and he 
gazed on the dead body of the young man and 
spoke no word. Yet he had loved Corogna, 
and out of love for him had made him Captain 
of his Guard. And he passed his hand wear- 
135 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


ily across his brow, murmuring, “ I cannot 
think, I cannot think.” And the Lady Lucia 
stood by him, her hand resting on his shoulder 
and her eyes full of tears. But at last the 
strange spell which lay on the senses of the 
Duke passed away : his eyes again had the 
light of reason in them, and he hstened while 
they told him how Antonio had himself es- 
caped, and had afterwards slain Corogna on 
the top of the hill where Antonio’s house had 
stood. And the Duke was very sorry for 
Corogna’s death ; and he looked round on 
them all, saying, “ He made of me a log of 
wood, and not a man. For when I had drunk 
and looked in his eyes, it seemed to me that 
my eyes were bound to his, and that I looked 
to him for command, and to know what I 
should do, and that he was my God, and with- 
out his will I could not move. Yes, I was 
then to him even as he had seemed to be to 
me as we rode from Baratesta. And even now 
I am not free from this strange affection ; for 
he seems still to be by me, and if his voice 
came now bidding me to do anything, by St. 
Frisian, I should arise and do it! Send my 
physician to me. And let this young man lie 
in the Chapel of the Blessed Virgin in the 
Cathedral, and to-morrow he shall be buried. 


ANTONIO AND THE WIZARD 


But when I am well, and this strange affection 
is passed from me, and hangs no more like a 
fog over my brain, then I will exact the price 
of his death from Antonio, together with the 
reckoning of all else in respect of which he 
stands in my debt.” 

But the Lady Lucia, hearing this, said bold- 
ly, “ My lord, it is by your deed and through 
your devices that this gentleman has met his 
death, and the blame of it is yours, and not 
my lord Antonio’s.” 

At her bold and angry word Duke Valentine 
was roused, and the last of his languor left him ; 
and he glared at her in wrath, crying, “ Go to 
your house ; ” and he rose up suddenly from 
where he sat and went into his cabinet, Lo- 
renzo attending him. And on the day after he 
walked first behind the bier of Corogna, and 
his face was very pale, but his air composed 
and his manner as it was wont to be. For the 
spell had passed and he was his own man again. 

But Count Antonio heard with great grief 
of the death of the young man, and was very 
sorry that he had been constrained to kill him, 
and took great blame to himself for seeking 
counsel of the Wizard of Baratesta, whence 
had come death to the young man no less than 
to the wizard himself. 

137 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


Such is the story of the drug which the 
Wizard of Baratesta gave to Duke Valentine 
of Firmola. To me it seems a strange tale, 
but yet it is well attested and stands on as 
strong a rock of testimony as anything which 
is told concerning the Count. The truth of 
it I do not understand, and often I ponder of 
it, wondering whether the Wizard of Barates- 
ta spoke truth, and why the drug which had 
no power over Count Antonio bound the 
senses and limbs of the Duke in utter torpor 
and helplessness. And once, when I was thus 
musing over the story, there came to my cell 
a monk of the Abbey of St. Frisian, who was 
an old man and very learned ; and I went to 
walk with him in the garden, and coming to the 
fountain we sat down by the basin ; and know- 
ing that his lore was wide and deep, I set be- 
fore him all the story, asking him if he knew 
of this strange drug ; but he smiled at me, 
and taking the cup that lay by the basin of 
the fountain, he filled it with the clear spark- 
ling water and drank a little, and held the cup 
to me, saying, “ I think the Wizard of Bara- 
testa would have wrought the spell as well 
with no other drug than this. ’ ’ 

“ You say a strange thing,” said I. 

“ And I do not marvel,” said he, ‘ ‘ that the 
138 


ANTONIO AND THE WIZARD 


Duke had no power over Count Antonio, for 
he knew not how to wield such power. But 
neither do I wonder that power lay in Count 
Antonio to bend the mind of the Duke to his 
will. I warrant you, Ambrose, that the won- 
derful drug was not difficult to compound.” 

Then I understood what he meant ; for he 
would have it that the drug was but a screen 
and a pretence, and that the power lay not in 
it, but in the man that gave it. Yet surely 
this is to explain what is obscure by a thing 
more obscure, and falls thus into a fault hated 
of the logicians. For Heaven may well have 
made a drug that binds the senses and limbs 
of men. Has not the poppy some such effect ? 
And the ancients fabled the like of the lotus 
plant. But can we conceive that one man 
should by the mere glance of his eye have such 
power over another as to become to him, by 
these means and no other, a lord and master ? 
In truth I find that hard to believe, and I 
doubt whether a man may lawfully believe it. 
Yet I know not. Knowledge spreads, and 
men grow wiser in hidden things ; and although 
I who write may not live till the time when 
the thing shall be made clear, yet it may be 
God’s will to send such light to the men of 
later days that, reading this story, they may 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


find in it nothing that is strange or unknown 
to their science and skill. I pray that they 
may use the knowledge God sends in His 
holy service, and not in the work of the devil, 
as did the Wizard of Baratesta. 

But Count Antonio being, by his guile and 
adroitness, and by that strange power which he 
had from the drug or whence I know not, 
delivered out of the hands of Duke Valentine, 
abode with his company on the hiUs through- 
out the cold of winter, expecting the day when 
he might win the hand of the Lady Lucia ; 
and she returned to her house, and said noth- 
ing of what had befallen the Duke. Yet the 
Duke showed her no tenderness, but rather 
used more severity with her. It is an evil 
service to a proud man to aid him in his day 
of humiliation. 


140 


CHAPTER V 


mUNT ANTONIO AND THE SACRED BONES 

There is one tale concerning Count Antonio 
of Monte Velluto, when he dwelt an outlaw in 
the hills, which men tell with fear and doubt, 
marvelling at the audacity of his act, and some- 
times asking themselves whether he would in 
very truth have performed what he swore on 
the faith of his honour he would do, in case 
the Duke did not accede to his demands. For 
the thing he threatened was such as no man of 
Firmola dares think on without a shudder ; for 
we of Firmola prize and reverence the bones 
of our saint, the holy martyr Frisian, above 
and far beyond every other relic, and they are 
to us as it were the sign and testimony of 
God’s enduring favour to our country. But 
much will a man do for love of a woman, and 
Antonio’s temper brooked no obstacle : so that 
I, who know all the truth of the matter, may 
not doubt that he would have done even as he 
said, braving the wrath of Heaven and making 
naught of the terror and consternation that 
had fallen on the city and the parts round 
10 141 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


about it. Whether that thought of his heart 
was such as would gain pardon, I know not : 
had the thing been done, I could scarce hope 
even in Heaven’s infinite mercy. Yet this 
story also I must teU, lest I be charged with 
covering up what shames Antonio ; for with 
the opinions of careless and faithless men (who 
are too many in this later age) I have no com- 
munion, and I tell the tale not to move laugh- 
ter or loose jests, but rather that I may show 
to what extremity a man in nature good may 
be driven by harshness and the unmerited dis- 
favour of his Prince. 

In the third year, then, of Count Antonio’s 
outlawry. His Highness the Duke looked on 
the Lady Lucia and found that she was of full 
age for marriage. Therefore he resolved that 
she should be wed, and, since Robert de Beau- 
regard, to whom he had purposed to give her, 
was dead, he chose from among his lords a 
certain gentleman of great estate and a favour- 
ite of his, by name Lorenzo, and sent word to 
Lucia that she had spent too much of her 
youth pining for what could not be hers, and 
must forthwith receive Lorenzo for her hus- 
band. But Lucia, being by now a woman 
and no more a timid girl, returned to His 
Highness a message that she would look on 
142 


THE SACRED BONES 


no other man than Antonio. On this the 
Duke, greatly incensed, sent and took her, 
and set her in a convent within the city walls, 
and made her know that there she should 
abide till her life’s end, or until she should 
obey his command ; and he charged the Ab- 
bess to treat her harshly and to break down 
her pride : and he swore that she should wed 
Lorenzo ; or, if she were obstinate, then she 
should take the vows of a nun in the convent. 
Many weeks the Lady Lucia abode in the 
convent, resisting all that was urged upon her. 
But at last, finding no help from Antonio, 
being sore beset and allowed no rest, she broke 
one day into passionate and pitiful weeping, 
and bade the Abbess tell His Highness that, 
since happiness was not for her in this world, 
she would seek to find it in Heaven, and 
would take the vows, rendering all her estate 
into the Duke’s hand, that he might have it, 
and give it to Lorenzo or to whom he would. 
Which message being told to Duke Valentine, 
weary of contending with her, and perchance 
secretly fearing that Antonio would slay Lo- 
renzo as he had slain Robert, he cursed her for 
an obstinate wench, and bade her take the vows, 
and set a day for her to take them : but her es- 
tate he assumed into his own hand, and made 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


from out of it a gift of great value to Lorenzo. 
And Lorenzo, they say, was well content thus 
to be quit of the matter. “For,” said he, 
“ while that devil is loose in the hiUs, no peace 
would there have been for the lady’s husband.” 

But when it came to the ears of Count 
Antonio that the Lady Lucia was to take the 
veil on the morrow of the feast of St. Frisian, 
his rage and affliction knew no bounds. “ If 
need be,” he cried, “ I will attack the city with 
all my men, before I will suffer it.” 

“Your men would be all killed, and she 
would take the veil none the less,” said Tom- 
masino. For Antonio had but fifty men, and 
although they were stout fellows and impos- 
sible to subdue so long as they stayed in the 
hills, yet their strength would have been noth- 
ing against a fortress and the Duke’s array. 

“ Then,” said Antonio, “ I will go alone and 
die alone.” 

As he spoke, he perceived Martolo coming 
to him, and, calling him, he asked him what 
he would. Now Martolo was a devout man 
and had been much grieved when Antonio 
had fallen under a sentence of excommunica- 
tion by reason of a certain quarrel that he had 
with the Abbot of the Abbey of St. Frisian in 
the hills, wherein the Count had incurred the 
144 


THE SACRED BONES 


condemnation of the Church, refusing, as his 
way was, to admit any rule save of his own 
conscience. Yet Martolo abode with Antonio 
from love of him. And now he bowed and 
answered, “ My lord, in three days it is the 
feast of St. Frisian, and the sacred bones will 
then be carried from the shrine in the church 
of the saint at Rilano to the city.” For it was 
at Rilano that Frisian had suffered, and a rich 
church had been built on the spot. 

“ I remember that it is wont to be so, Mar- 
tolo,” answered the Count. 

“ When I dwelt with my father,” said Mar- 
tolo, “ I was accustomed to go forth with all 
the people of my village and meet the sacred 
bones, and, kneeling, receive the benediction 
from the Lord Archbishop as he passed, bear- 
ing the bones in their golden casket. And the 
like I would do this year, my lord.” 

“ But are you not excommunicated in com- 
pany with Count Antonio and me ? ” asked 
Tommasino, lightly smiling ; for Tommasino 
also stood condemned. 

“ I pray not. I was not named in the sen- 
tence,” said Martolo, signing the cross. 

“ Go in peace, Martolo ; but see that you 
are not taken by the Duke’s men,” said Count 
Antonio. 


145 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


“ But few of them go with the Archbishop, 
my lord. For who would lay hands on the 
sacred bones ? The guard is smaU, and I shall 
easily elude them.” So Martolo departed, and 
told the man they called Bena what had 
passed ; but Bena was a graceless fellow and 
would not go with him. 

Now when Martolo was gone, Count An- 
tonio sat down on a great stone and for a long 
while he said nothing to Tommasino. But 
certain words out of those which Martolo had 
spoken were echoing through his brain, and he 
could not put them aside ; for they came again 
and again and again ; and at last, looking up 
at Tommasino who stood by him, he said, 
“Tommasino, who would lay hands on the 
sacred bones ? ” 

Tommasino looked down into his eyes ; then 
he laid a hand on his shoulder ; and Antonio 
still looked up and repeated, “ Who would lay 
hands on the sacred bones ? ” 

Tommasino’s eyes grew round in wonder : 
he smiled, but his smile was uneasy, and he 
shifted his feet. “ Is it that you think of, An- 
tonio ? ” he asked in a low voice. “ Beside it, 
it would be a light thing to kill the Duke in 
his own palace.” 

Then Antonio cried, striking his fist on the 
146 


THE SACRED BONES 


palm of his hand, ‘‘Are dead bones more 
sacred than that living soul on which the 
Duke lays hands to force it to his will ? ” 

“The people reverence the bones as God 
Himself,” said Tommasino, troubled. 

“ I also reverence them,” said Antonio, and 
fell again into thought. But presently he rose 
and took Tommasino’s arm; and for a long 
while they walked to and fro. Then they went 
and sought out certain chosen men of the 
band ; for the greater part they dared not trust 
in such a matter, but turned only to them that 
were boldest and recked least of sacred things. 
To ten of such Antonio opened his counsel ; 
and by great rewards he prevailed on them to 
come into the plan, although they were, for all 
their boldness, very sore afraid lest they, laying 
hands on the bones, should be smitten as was 
he who touched the Ark of the Covenant. 
Therefore Antonio said, “I alone will lay 
hands on the golden casket ; the rest of you 
shall but hold me harmless while I take it.” 

“ But if the Lord Archbishop will not let it 
go?” 

“ The Lord Archbishop,” said Tommasino, 
“ will let it go.” For Tommasino did not love 
the Archbishop, because he would not remove 
the sentence of excommunication which he had 
147 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


laid upon Antonio and Tommasino on the 
prayer of the Abbot of St. Frisian’s. 

Now when the feast of St. Frisian was come, 
the Lord Archbishop, who had ridden from the 
city on the eve of the feast, and had lodged in 
the house of the priests that served the church, 
went with all his train into the church, and, 
the rest standing afar off and veiling their 
eyes, took from the wall of the church, near by 
the High Altar, the golden casket that held 
the bones of the blessed St. Frisian. And he 
wrapped the casket in a rich cloth and held it 
high before him in his two hands. And when 
the people had worshipped, the Archbishop 
left the church and entered his chair and 
passed through the village of Rilano, the 
priests and attendants going first, and twelve 
of the Duke’s Guard, whom the Duke had 
sent, following after. Great was the throng 
of folk, come from all the country round to 
gaze on the casket and on the procession of the 
Lord Archbishop; and most devout of them 
aU was Martolo, who rested on his knees from 
the moment the procession left the church till 
it was clear of the village. And Martolo was 
still on his knees when he beheld go by him a 
party of peasants, all, save one, tall and power- 
ful men, wearing peasants’ garb and having 
148 


THE SACRED BONES 


their faces over-shadowed by large hats. 
These men also had knelt as the casket 
passed, but they had risen, and were march- 
ing shoulder to shoulder behind the men of 
the Dukes Guard, a peasant behind every 
pikeman. Martolo gazed long at them; then 
he moistened his lips and crossed himself, mur- 
muring, ‘‘What does this thing mean? Now 

God forbid ! ” And, breaking off thus, he 

also rose and went to the house of his father, 
sore vexed and troubled to know what the 
thing might mean. But he spoke of it to 
none, no, not to his father, observing the vow 
of secrecy in all matters which he had made to 
Count Antonio. 

At the bounds of the village the greater part 
of the people ceased to follow the procession 
of the sacred bones, and, having received the 
Archbishop s blessing, turned back to their 
own homes, where they feasted and made 
merry ; but the twelve peasants whom Martolo 
had seen followed the procession when it set 
forth for the next village, distant three miles 
on the road to Firmola. Their air manifested 
great devotion, for they walked with heads 
bent on their breasts and downcast eyes, and 
they spoke not once on the way; but each 
kept close behind a pikeman. When the pro- 
149 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


cession had gone something more than a mile 
from the village of Rilano, it came where a 
httle stream crosses the highway; and the 
rains having been heavy for a week before, the 
stream was swollen and the ford deeper than it 
was wont to be. Therefore the officer of the 
Guard, thinking of no danger, bade six of his 
men lay down their pikes and go lift the Arch- 
bishop’s chair over the ford, lest the Arch- 
bishop should be wetted by the water. And 
on hearing this order, the tallest among the 
peasants put his hand up to his hat and twisted 
the feather of it between his thumb and his 
forefinger: and the shortest of them whis- 
pered, “ The sign ! The sign ! ” while every 
man of them drew a great dagger from under 
his habit and held it behind his back. Now 
by this time the priests and attendants had 
passed the ford ; and one-half of the Guard 
had laid down their pikes and were gone to 
raise the Archbishop’s chair, the remainder 
standing at their ease, leaning on their pikes 
and talking to one another. Again the tallest 
peasant twisted the feather in his hat; and 
without speech or cry the peasants darted for- 
ward. Six of them seized the pikes that lay 
on the ground ; the remaining six sprang like 
wild-cats on the backs of the pikemen, circling 


THE SACRED BONES 

the necks of the pikemen with their arms, 
pulling them back and coming near to throt- 
tling them, so that the pikemen, utterly- 
amazed and taken full at disadvantage, stag- 
gered and fell backward, while the peasants 
got on the top of them and knelt on their 
breasts and set the great daggers at their 
hearts. While this passed on the road, the 
remainder of Antonio’s band — for such were 
the peasants — rushed into the stream and com- 
pelled the unarmed pikemen to set down the 
Archbishop’s chair in the midst, so that the 
water came in at the windows of the chair; 
and the pikemen, held at bay with their own 
pikes, sought to draw their poniards, but An- 
tonio cried, “ Slay any that draw ! ” And he 
came to the chair and opened the door of it, 
and, using as little force as he might he laid 
hands on the casket that held the sacred bones, 
and wrested it from the feeble hands of the 
Archbishop. Then he and his men, standing 
in line, stepped backward with the pikes 
levelled in front of them till they came out of 
the water and on to the dry road again ; and 
one pikeman rushed at Antonio, but Tomma- 
sino, sparing to kill him, caught him a buffet 
on the side of the head with a pike, and he fell 
like a log in the water, and had been drowned, 
161 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


but that two of his comrades lifted him. Then 
all twelve of the band being together — for the 
first six had risen now from off the six pike- 
men, having forced them, on pain of instant 
death, to deliver over their pikes to them — 
Antonio, with the casket in his hands, spoke 
in a loud voice, “ I thank God that no man is 
dead over this business ; but if you resist, you 
shall die one and all. Go to the city ; tell the 
Duke that I, Antonio of Monte Velluto, have 
the bones of the blessed St. Frisian, and carry 
them with me to my hiding-place in the high- 
est parts of the hills. But if he will swear by 
these bones that I hold, and by his princely 
word, that he will not suffer the Lady Lucia 
to take the vows, nor will constrain her to wed 
any man, but will restore her to her own house 
and to her estate, then let him send the Arch- 
bishop again, and I will deliver up the sacred 
bones. But if he will not swear, then, as God 
lives, to-morrow, at midnight, I will cause a 
great fire to be kindled on the top of the hills 
— a fire whose flame you shall see from the 
walls of the city — and in that fire will I con- 
sume the sacred bones, and I will scatter the 
ashes of them to the four winds. Go and bear 
the message that I give you to the Duke.” 

And, having thus said, Antonio, with his 
152 


THE SACRED BONES 


men, turned and went back at a run along the 
road by which they had come ; but to the vil- 
lage of Rilano they did not go, but turned aside 
before they came to it, and, coming to the farm 
of one who knew Antonio, they bought of him, 
paying him in good coin of the Duchy, three 
horses, which Antonio, Tommasino, and Bena 
mounted ; and they three rode hard for the 
hills, the rest following as quickly as they 
might ; so that by nightfall they were all safely 
assembled in their hiding-place, and with them 
the bones of the blessed St. Frisian. But they 
told not yet to the rest of the band what it was 
that Antonio carried under his cloak ; nor did 
Martolo, when he returned from Rilano, ask 
what had befallen, but he crossed himself many 
times and wore a fearful look. 

But Tommasino came to Antonio and said to 
him, “ Why did you not ask also pardon for all 
of us, and for yourself the hand of Lucia ? ” 

“ A great thing, and a thing that troubles 
me, I have done already,” answered Antonio. 
“ Therefore I will ask nothing for myself, and 
nothing may I ask for you or for my friends. 
But if I ask nothing save that right and jus- 
tice be done, it may be that my sin in laying 
hands on the sacred bones will be the less.” 

Now after Antonio and his men were gone, 
153 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


the Archbishop’s train stayed long by the 
stream on the road, lamenting and fearing to 
go forward. Yet at last they went forward, 
and being come to the next village found all 
the people awaiting them at the bounds. And 
when the people saw the disorder of the pro- 
cession, and that the pikemen had no pikes, 
they ran forward, eagerly asking what had be- 
fallen ; and learning of the calamity, they were 
greatly afraid and cursed Antonio ; and many 
of them accompanied the Archbishop on his 
way to the city, where he came towards even- 
ing. A great concourse of people awaited his 
coming there, and the Duke himself sat on a 
lofty seat in the great square, prepared to re- 
ceive the sacred bones, and go with them to 
the Cathedral, where they were to be exposed 
to the gaze of the people at High Mass. And 
they set the Archbishop’s chair down before 
the Duke’s seat, and the Archbishop came and 
stood before the Duke, and his priests and the 
pikemen with him. And the Duke started up 
from his seat, crying, “ What ails you ? ” and 
sank back again, and sat waiting to hear what 
the Archbishop should say. 

Then the Archbishop, his robes still damp 
and greatly disordered, his limbs trembling in 
anger and in fear, raised his voice ; and all the 
154 


THE SACRED BONES 


multitude in the square was silent while he de- 
clared to His Highness what things Count An- 
tonio had done, and rehearsed the message that 
he had sent. But when the Archbishop told 
how Antonio had sworn that as God lived he 
would scatter the ashes of the sacred bones to 
the winds, the men caught their breath with a 
gasp, while the women murmured afFrightedly, 
“ Christ save us ; ” and Duke Valentine dug 
the nails of his hand, whereon his head rested, 
into the flesh of his cheek. For all the city 
held that, according to the words St. Frisian 
himself had uttered before he suffered, the 
power and prosperity of the Duchy and the 
favour of Heaven to it rested on the presence 
among them and the faithful preservation and 
veneration of those most holy relics. And the 
Archbishop, having ended the message, cried, 
‘‘ God pardon my lips that repeat such words,” 
and fell on his knees before Duke Valentine, 
crying, “ Justice on him, my lord, justice ! ” 
And many in the throng echoed his cry ; but 
others, and among them a great part of the ap- 
prenticed lads who loved Antonio, muttered 
low one to another, “ But the Duke has taken 
his sweetheart from him,” and they looked on 
the Duke with no favourable eye. 

Then Duke Valentine rose from his seat 
155 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


and stood on the topmost step that led to it, 
and he called sundry of his lords and officers 
round him, and then he beckoned for silence, 
and he said, “ Before the sun sets to-morrow, 
the Lady Lucia shall take the vows ; ” and he, 
with his train, took their way to the Palace, 
the pikemen clearing a path for them. And 
now indeed was silence; for all marvelled and 
were struck dumb that the Duke said naught 
concerning the bones of St. Frisian, and they 
searched one another’s faces for the meaning 
of his words. But the Archbishop arose, and, 
speaking to no man, went to the Cathedral, 
and knelt before the altar in the chapel of 
St. Frisian, and there abode on his knees. 

Surely never, from that day until this hour, 
has such a night passed in the city of Firmola. 
For the Duke sent orders that every man of 
his Guard should be ready to start at break of 
day in pursuit of Antonio, and through the 
hours of the evening they were busied in pre- 
paring their provisions and accoutrements. 
But their looks were heavy and their tongues 
tied, for they knew, every man of them, that 
though the Duke might at the end take An- 
tonio, yet he could not come at him before 
the time that Antonio had said. And this the 
townsmen knew well also ; and they gathered 
156 


THE SACRED BONES 


themselves in groups in the great square, say- 
ing, “ Before the Duke comes at him, the sa- 
cred bones will be burnt, and what will then 
befall the Duchy ? ” And those who were 
friendly to Antonio, foremost among them 
being the apprenticed lads, spread themselves 
here and there among the people, asking cun- 
ningly whether it concerned the people of 
Firmola more that the blessing of St. Frisian 
should abide with them, or that a reluctant 
maiden should be forced to take the veil ; and 
some grew bold to whisper under their breath 
that the business was a foul one, and that 
Heaven did not send beauty and love that 
priests should bury them in convent walls. 
And the girls of the city, ever most bold by 
reason of their helplessness, stirred up the 
young men who courted them, leading them 
on and saying, ‘‘ He is a true lover who risks 
his soul for his love ; ” or, ‘‘ I would I had 
one who would steal the bones of St. Frisian 
for my sake, but none such have I : ” with 
other stirring and inflaming taunts, recklessly 
flung from pouting lips and from under eyes 
that challenged. And all the while Duke 
Valentine sat alone in his cabinet, listening to 
the tumult that sounded with muffled din 
through the walls of the Falace. 

11 157 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 

Now there was in the city a certain furrier 
named Peter, a turbulent fellow, who had 
been put out of his craft-guild because he 
would not abide by the laws of the craft, and 
lived now as he best could, being maintained 
in large measure by those who listened to his 
empty and seditious conversation. This man, 
loving naught that there was worthy of love 
in Count Antonio, yet loved him because he 
defied the Duke; and about midnight, having 
drunk much wine, he came into the square 
and gathered together the apprentices, saying, 
“ I have a matter to say to you — and to you 
— and to you,” till there were many scores of 
them round him: then he harangued them, 
and more came round ; and when at last 
Peter cried, “ Give us back the sacred bones I ” 
a thousand voices answered him, “Ay, give 
us back the bones 1 ” And when the pikemen 
would have seized him, men, and women also, 
made a ring round him, so that he could not 
be taken. And sober men also, of age and 
substance, hearkened to him, saying, ‘‘ He is 
a knave, but he speaks truth now^” So that a 
very great throng assembled, every man hav- 
ing a staff, and many also knives ; and to 
those that had not knives, the women and 
girls brought them, thrusting them into their 
158 


THE SACRED BONES 

hands ; nay, sundry priests also were among 
the people, moaning and wringing their hands, 
and saying that the favour of St. Frisian 
would be lost forever to the city. And the 
square was thronged, so that a man could not 
move unless all moved, nor raise his hand to 
his head save by the favour of his neighbour. 
Yet presently the whole mass began to move, 
like a great wave of water, towards the Pal- 
ace of the Duke, where the pikemen stood 
in ranks, ready now to go against Antonio. 
Suddenly arose a cry, ‘‘ The Archbishop 
comes ! ” and the venerable man was seen, led 
through the crowd by Peter and some more, 
who brought him and set him in the front 
ranks of the people ; and Peter cried boldly. 
Where is the Duke ? ” But the Captain of 
the Guard came forward, sword in hand, and 
bade Peter be still, cursing him for insolence, 
and shouted that the people should disperse 
on pain of His Highness’s displeasure. Where 
is the Duke ? Let him come out to us ! ” 
cried Peter; and the captain, despising him, 
struck him lightly with the flat of his sword. 
But Peter with a cry of rage struck the cap- 
tain a great blow with his staff, and the cap- 
tain staggered back, blood flowing from his 
head. Such was the beginning of the fray; 

159 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


for in an instant the pikemen and the people 
had joined battle : men cried in anger and 
women in fright : blood flowed, and sundry 
on both sides fell and rose no more ; and the 
Archbishop came near to being trodden under 
foot till his friends and the priests gathered 
round him ; and when he saw that men were 
being slain, he wept. 

Then the lord Lorenzo hastened to the 
cabinet of the Duke, whom he found pacing 
up and down, gnawing his finger-nails, and 
told him of what was done outside. 

“ I care not,” said the Duke. ‘‘ She shall 
take the vows ! Let the pikemen scatter 
them.” 

Lorenzo then besought him, telling him that 
all the city was in arms, and that the conflict 
would be great. But the Duke said still, 
“She shall take the vows !” Nevertheless he 
went with Lorenzo, and came forth on to the 
topmost step of the portico. And when the 
people saw him they ceased for a moment to 
assail the pikemen, and cried out, “ Give us 
back the sacred bones ! ” 

“ Scatter these fellows 1 ” said the Duke to 
the Captain of the Guard. 

“ My lord, they are too many. And if we 
scatter them now, yet when we have gone 
160 


THE SACRED BONES 


against Count Antonio, they may do what 
they will with the city.” 

The Duke stood still, pale, and again gnaw- 
ing his nails ; and the pikemen, finding the 
fight hard, gave back before the people; and 
the people pressed on. 

Then Peter the furrier came forward, and 
the hottest with him, and mocked the pike- 
men ; and one of the pikemen suddenly thrust 
Peter through with his pike, and the fellow 
fell dead ; on which a great cry of rage rose 
from all the people, and they rushed on the 
pikemen again and slew and were slain ; and 
the fight rolled up the steps even to the very 
feet of the Duke himself. And at last, able 
no longer to contend with all the city, he cried, 
‘‘ Hold ! I will restore the sacred bones ! ” 
But the people would not trust him and one 
cried, Bring out the lady here before us and 
set her free, or we will burn the Palace.” And 
the Archbishop came suddenly and threw him- 
self on his knees before the Duke, beseeching 
him that no more blood might be shed, but 
that the Lady Lucia should be set free. And 
the Duke, now greatly afraid, sent hastily the 
Lieutenant of the Guard and ten men, who 
came to the convent where Lucia was, and, 
brooking no delay, carried her with them in 
161 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


her bedgown, and brought and set her beside 
the Duke in the portico of the Palace. Then 
the Duke raised his hand to heaven, and before 
all the people he said, “ Behold, she is free ! 
Let her go to her own house, and her estate 
shall be hers again. And by my princely word 
and these same holy bones, I swear that she 
shall not take the vows, neither will I con- 
strain her to wed any man.” And when he 
had said this, he turned sharply round on 
his heel, and, looking neither to the right 
nor to the left, went through the great hall to 
his cabinet and shut the door. For his heart 
was very sore that he must yield to Antonio’s 
demand, and for himself he had rather a thou- 
sand times that the bones of St. Frisian had 
been burnt. 

Now when the Duke was gone, the people 
brought the Lady Lucia to her own house, 
driving out the steward whom the Duke had 
set there, and, this done, they came to the 
Archbishop, and would not suffer him to rest 
or to delay one hour before he set forth to 
carry the Duke’s promise to Antonio. This 
the Archbishop was ready to do, for all that 
he was weary. But first he sent Lorenzo to 
ask the Duke’s pleasure ; and Lorenzo, coming 
to the Duke, prayed him to send two hundred 
162 


THE SACRED BONES 


pikes with the Archbishop. “ For,” said he, 
‘‘Your Highness has sworn nothing concern- 
ing what shall befall Antonio; and so soon as 
he has delivered up the bones, I will set on 
him and bring him alive or dead to Your 
Highness.” 

But the Duke would not hearken. “ The 
fellow’s name is like stale lees of wine in my 
mouth,” said he. “Ten of my pikemen lie 
dead in the square, and more of the citizens. 
I will lose no more men over it.” 

“ Yet how great a thing if we could take 
him ! ” 

“ I will take him at my own time and in my 
own way,” said the Duke. “ In God’s name, 
leave me now.” 

Lorenzo therefore got from the Duke leave 
for but ten men to go with the Archbishop, 
and to go himself if he would. And thus 
they set out, exhorted by the people, who fol- 
lowed them beyond the bounds of the city, to 
make all speed. And when they were gone, 
the people came back and took up the bodies 
of the dead ; while the pikemen also took up 
the bodies of such of their comrades as were 
slain. 

Yet had Duke Valentine known what passed 
on the hills while the city was in tumult, it 
163 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


may not be doubted, for all his vexation, that 
he would have sent the two hundred whom 
Lorenzo asked : never had he a fairer chance 
to take Antonio. For when the Count and 
those who had been with him to Rilano were 
asleep, Antonio’s head resting on the golden 
casket, a shepherd came to the rest of the 
band and told them what had been done and 
how all the country was in an uproar. Then 
a debate arose amongst the band, for, though 
they were lawless men, yet they feared God, 
and thought with great dread on what Anto- 
nio had sworn; so that presently they came 
altogether, and roused Antonio, and said to 
him, ‘‘ My lord, you have done much for us, 
and it may be that we have done somewhat 
for you. But we will not suffer the sacred 
bones to be burnt and scattered to the winds.” 

“ Except the Duke yields, I have sworn it, 
as God lives,” answered Antonio. 

“We care not. It shall not be, no, not 
though you and we die,” said they. 

“ It is well : I hear,” said Antonio, bowing 
his head. 

“ In an hour,” said they, “ we will take the 
bones, if you will not yourself, my lord, send 
them back.” 

“Again I hear,” said Antonio, bowing his 
164 


THE SACRED BONES 


head; and the band went back to the fire 
round which they had been sitting, all save 
Martolo, who came and put his hand in An- 
tonio’s hand. 

“ How now, Martolo ? ” asked Antonio. 

“ What you will, I will, my lord,” said Mar- 
tolo. For though he trembled when he 
thought of the bones of St. Frisian, yet he 
clung always to Antonio. As for Bena and 
the others of the ten who had gone to Rilano, 
they would now have burnt not the bones 
only, but the blessed saint himself, had Anto- 
nio bidden them. Hard men, in truth, were 
they, and the more reckless now, because no 
harm had come to them from the seizing of 
the bones ; moreover Antonio had given them 
good wine for supper, and they drank well. 

Now the rest of the band being gone back 
to their fire and the night being very dark, in 
great silence and caution Antonio, Tomma- 
sino, Martolo, Bena, and their fellows — being 
thirteen in all — rose from their places, and 
taking naught with them but their swords 
(save that Antonio carried the golden casket), 
they stole forth from the camp, and set their 
faces to climb yet higher into the heights of 
the hills. None spoke ; one following an- 
other, they climbed the steep path that led up 
165 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


the mountain side ; and when they had been 
going for the space of an hour, they heard a 
shout from far below them. 

“ Our flight is known,” said Tommasino. 

“ Shall we stand and meet them, my lord? ” 
asked Bena. 

“ Nay, not yet,” said Antonio; and the thir- 
teen went forward again at the best speed they 
could. 

Now they were in a deep gorge between 
lofty cliffs ; and the gorge still tended up- 
ward; and at length they came to the place 
which is now named “Antonio’s Neck.” 
There the rocks came nigh to meeting and 
utterly barring the path; yet there is a way 
that one man, or at most tw^o, may pass 
through at one time. Along this narrow 
tongue they passed, and, coming to the other 
side, found a level space on the edge of a great 
precipice, and, Antonio pointing over the 
precipice, they saw in the light of the day, 
which now was dawning, the towers and spires 
of Firmola very far away in the plain below. 

“It is a better place for the Are than the 
other,” said Antonio; and Bena laughed, 
while Martolo shivered. 

“Yet we risk being hindered by these fel- 
lows behind,” said Tommasino. 

166 


THE SACRED BONES 


‘‘Nay, I think not,” said Antonio. 

Then he charged Tommasino and all of them 
to busy themselves in collecting such dry sticks 
and brushwood as they could ; and there was 
abundance near, for the fir-trees grew even so 
high. And one of the men also went and set 
a snare, and presently caught a wild goat, so 
that they had meat. But Antonio took Bena 
and set him on one side of the way where the 
neck opened out into the level space ; and he 
stood on the other side of the way himself. 
And when they stretched out their arms, the 
point of Bena’s sword reached the hilt of An- 
tonio’s. And Antonio smiled, saying to Bena, 
“ He had need to be a thin man, Bena, that 
passes between you and me.” 

And Bena nodded his head at Count Anto- 
nio, answering, “Indeed this is as straight as 
the way to heaven, my lord, and leads, as it 
seems to me, in much the same direction.” 

Thus Antonio and Bena waited in the shel- 
ter of the rocks at the opening of the neck, 
while the rest built up a great pile of wood. 
Then, having roasted the meat, they made 
their breakfast, Martolo carrying portions to 
Antonio and to Bena. And, their pursuers not 
knowing the path so well and therefore moving 
less quickly, it was but three hours short of 
167 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


noon when they heard the voices of men from 
the other side of the neck. And Antonio 
cried straightway, “Come not through at your 
peril ! Yet one may come and speak with me.” 

Then a great fellow, whose name is variously 
given, though most of those whom I have 
questioned call him Sancho, came through the 
neck, and, reaching the end of it, found the 
crossed swords of Antonio and Bena like a 
fence against his breast. And he saw also the 
great pile of wood, and resting now on the top 
of it the golden casket that held the sacred 
bones. And he said to Antonio, “ My lord, 
we love you ; but sooner than that the bones 
should be burnt, we will kill you and all that 
are with you.” 

But Antonio answered, “I also love you, 
Sancho ; yet you and all your company shall 
die sooner than my oath shall be broken.” 

“Your soul shall answer for it, my lord,” 
said Sancho. 

“ You speak truly,” answered Antonio. 

Then Sancho went back through the neck 
and took counsel with his fellows ; and they 
made him their chief, and promised to be 
obedient to all that he ordered. And he said, 
“ Let two run at their highest speed through 
the neck; it may be they will die, but the 
168 


THE SACRED BONES 


bones must be saved. And after them, two 
more, and again two. And I will be of the 
first two.” 

But they would not suffer him to be of the 
first two, although he prevailed that he should 
be of the last two. And the six, being chosen, 
drew their swords and with a cry rushed into 
the neck. Antonio, hearing their feet, said to 
Bena, ‘ ‘ A quick blow is as good as a slow, 
Bena.” And even as he spoke the first two 
came to the opening of the neck. But Anto- 
nio and Bena struck at them before they came 
out of the narrowest part or could wield their 
swords freely ; and the second two coming on, 
Bena struck at one and wounded him in the 
breast, and he wounded Bena in the face over 
the right eye, and then Bena slew him ; while 
Antonio slew his man at his first stroke. And 
the fifth man and Sancho, the sixth, coming 
on, Antonio cried loudly, “ Are you mad, are 
you mad ? We could hold the neck against a 
hundred.” 

But they would not stop, and Antonio slew 
the fifth, and Bena was in the act to strike at 
Sancho, but Antonio suddenly dashed Sancho’s 
sword from his hand, and caught him a mighty 
buffet, so that he fell sprawling on the bodies 
of the five that were dead. 

169 


CHKONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


‘‘ Go back, fool, go back ! ’’ cried Antonio. 

And Sancho, answering nothing, gathered 
himself up and went back; for he perceived 
now that not with the loss of half of his men 
would he get by Antonio and Bena ; and be- 
yond them stood Tommasino with ten whom 
he knew to be of the stoutest of the band. 

‘‘It is a sore day’s work, Bena,” cried An- 
tonio, looking at the dead bodies. 

“ If a man be too great a fool to keep him- 
self alive, my lord, he must die,” answered 
Bena ; and he pushed the bodies a little further 
back into the neck with his foot. 

Then Sancho’s company took counsel again ; 
for, much as they reverenced the sacred bones, 
there was none of them eager to enter the 
neck. Thus they were at a loss, till the shep- 
herd who had come along with them spoke to 
Sancho, saying, “At the cost of a long journey 
you may come at him; for there is a way 
round that I can lead you by. But you will 
not traverse it in less than twelve or thirteen 
hours, taking necessary rest by the way.” 

But Sancho, counting the time, cried, “ It 
will serve ! For although a thousand came 
against him, yet the Count will not burn the 
bones before the time of his oath.” 

Therefore he left fifteen men to hold the 
170 


THE SACRED BONES 


neck, in case Antonio should offer to return 
back through it, and with the rest he followed 
the shepherd in great stealth and quiet ; by 
reason of which, and of the rock between them, 
Antonio knew not what was done, but thought 
that the whole company lay still on the other 
side of the neck. 

Thus the day wore to evening as the Arch- 
bishop with the Lord Lorenzo and the Guards 
came to the spur of the hills ; and here they 
found a man waiting, who cried to them, ‘‘ Do 
you bring the Duke’s promise to the Count 
Antonio ? ” 

“Yes, we bring it,” said they. 

“ I am charged,” said he, “ to lead the Arch- 
bishop and one other after the Count.” But 
since the Archbishop could not climb the hills, 
being old and weary, Lorenzo constrained the 
man to take with him four of the Guards be- 
sides ; and the four bore the Archbishop along. 
Thus they were led through the secret tracks 
in the hills, and these Lorenzo tried to engrave 
on his memory, that he might come again. 
But the way was long and devious, and it was 
hard to mark it. Thus going, they came to 
the huts, and, passing the huts, stiU climbed 
wearily till they arrived near to the neck. It 
was then night, and, as they guessed, hard 
171 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


on the time when Antonio had sworn to burn 
the sacred bones ; therefore they pressed on 
more and more, and came at last to the en- 
trance of the neck. Here they found the fif- 
teen, and Lorenzo, running up, cried aloud, 
“We bring the promise, we bring the 
promise ! ” 

But scarcely had he spoken these words, 
when a sudden great shout came from the 
other side of the neck ; and Lorenzo, drawing 
his sword, rushed into the neck, the fifteen fol- 
lowing, yet leaving a space between him and 
them, lest they should see him fall, pierced by 
Antonio and Bena. And Lorenzo stumbled 
and fell over the five dead bodies which lay in 
the way of the neck. Uttering a cry, “ What 
are these ? ” he scrambled again to his feet, 
and passed unhurt through the mouth of the 
neck, and the fifteen followed after him, while 
the Guards supported the Archbishop in their 
hands, his chair being too wide to pass through 
the neck. And when thus they all came 
through, wild and strange was the sight they 
saw. For it chanced that at the same time 
Sancho’s company had completed their circuit, 
and had burst from behind upon Antonio and 
the twelve. And when the twelve saw them, 
they retreated to the great pile and made a 
172 


THE SACRED BONES 


ring round it, and stood there ready to die 
rather than allow Sancho’s men to reach the 
pile. It was then midnight and the time of 
Count Antonio’s oath. Count Antonio stood 
on the top of the great pile ; at his feet lay the 
golden casket containing the sacred bones, and 
in his hand was a torch. And he cried aloud, 
‘‘ Hold them, while I fire the pile ! ” and he 
leapt down and came to the side of the pile 
and laid his torch to the pile. And in an in- 
stant the flames shot up, for the pile was dry. 

Now when Sancho’s men saw the pile alight, 
with shouts of horror and of terror they charged 
at the top of their speed against the twelve who 
guarded the pile. And Lorenzo and his men 
also rushed ; but the cries of Sancho’s company, 
together with the answering defiance of the 
twelve, drowned the cries of Lorenzo ; and 
Antonio and the twelve knew not that Lorenzo 
was come. And the flames of the pile grew, 
and the highest tongue of flame licked the side 
of the golden casket. But Antonio’s voice 
rose above all, as he stood, ay, almost within 
the ambit of the Are, and cried, ‘‘ Hold them a 
moment, Tommasino — a moment, Bena — and 
the thing is done ! ” Then Lorenzo tore his 
casque from his head and flung down his sword, 
and rushed unarmed between Antonio’s men 
13 173 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


and Sancho’s men, shouting louder than he had 
thought ever to shout, ‘‘The promise! the 
promise ! ” And at the same moment (so it 
is told, I but tell it as it is told) there came 
from heaven a great flash of lightning, which, 
aiding the glare of the flames, fully revealed 
the features of Lorenzo. Back fell Sancho’s 
men, and Antonio’s arrested their swords. And 
then they all cried as men cry in great joy, 
“ The promise, the promise! ” And for a mo- 
ment all stood still where they were. But the 
flames leapt higher ; and, as Antonio had said, 
they were seen by the great throng that gazed 
from the city walls ; and they were seen by 
Duke Valentine as he watched from the wall 
of his garden by the river ; and he went pale, 
gnawing his nails. 

Then the Count Antonio sprang on the 
burning pile, though it seemed that no man 
could pass alive through it. Yet God was 
with him, and he gained the top of it, and, 
stooping, seized the golden casket and flung it 
down, clear of the pile, even at the Lord Lo- 
renzo’s feet ; and when Lorenzo sought to lift 
it, the heat of it bhstered his hands, and he 
cried out with pain. But Count Antonio, 
choked by the smoke, his hair and his eyebrows 
scorched by the fire, staggered half-way down 
174 


THE SACRED BONES 


the pile and there sank on his knees. And 
there he had died, but that Tommasino, Bena, 
and Sancho, each eager to outstrip the other, 
rushed in and drew him forth, and fetched 
water and gave it to him, so that he breathed 
again and lived. But the flames leapt higher 
and higher ; and they said on the city walls, 

‘ ‘ God help us ! God help us ! The sacred 
bones are burnt ! ” And women, ay, and men 
too, fell to weeping, and there was great sorrow, 
fear, and desolation. And the Duke gnawed 
his nails even to the quick, and spat the blood 
from his mouth, cursing Antonio. 

But Lorenzo, having perceived that the 
greater number was against Antonio, cried 
out to Sancho’s men, “ Seize him and bring 
him here ! ” For the Duke’s promise carried 
no safety to Antonio. 

But Sancho answered him, ‘‘Now that the 
sacred bones are safe, we have no quarrel with 
my lord Antonio ; ” and he and his men went 
and laid down their swords by the feet of 
Antonio, where he lay on the ground, his 
head on Tommasino’s lap. So that the whole 
band were now round Antonio, and Lorenzo 
had but four with him. 

“ He asks war ! ” growled Bena to Tomma- 
sino. “ Shall he not have war, my lord ? ” 

175 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


And Tommasino laughed, answering, “Here 
is a drunkard of blood ! ” 

But Count Antonio, raising himself, said, 
Is the Archbishop here ? ” 

Then Lorenzo went and brought the Arch- 
bishop, who, coming, stood before Antonio, 
and rehearsed to him the oath that Duke Val- 
entine had taken, and told him how the Lady 
Lucia was already free and in her own house, 
and made him aware also of the great tumult 
that had happened in the city. And Antonio 
listened to his tale in silence. 

Then the Archbishop raised a hand towards 
heaven and spoke in a solemn and sad voice, 
“ Behold, there are ten of the Duke’s Guard 
dead in the city, and there are twelve of the 
townsmen dead ; and here, in the opening of 
the neck, there lie dead five men of those who 
followed you, my lord. Twenty-and-seven 
men are there that have died over this busi- 
ness. I pray more have not died in the city 
since I set forth. And for what has this been 
done, my lord ? And more than the death of 
all these is there. For these sacred bones 
have been foully and irreligiously stolen and 
carried away, used with vile irreverence and 
brought into imminent hazard of utter de- 
struction : and had they been destroyed and 
176 


THE SACRED BONES 


their ashes scattered to the four winds, accord- 
ing to your blasphemous oath, I know not 
what would have befallen the country where 
such an act was done. And for what has this 
been done, my lord ? It has been done that a 
proud and violent man may have his will and 
that his passion may be satisfied. Heavy in- 
deed is the burden on your soul, my lord; 
yes, on your soul is the weight of sacrilege and 
of much blood.” 

The Archbishop ceased, and his hand dropped 
to his side. The flames on the pile were burn- 
ing low, and a stillness fell on all the company. 
But at last Count Antonio rose to his feet and 
stood with his elbow on Tommasino s shoulder, 
leaning on Tommasino. His face was weary 
and sad, and he was very pale, save where in 
one spot the flame had scorched his cheek to 
an angry red. And looking round on the 
Archbishop, and on the Lord Lorenzo, and on 
them all, he answered sadly, “In truth, my 
Lord Archbishop, my burden is heavy. For 
I am an outlaw, and excommunicate. Twen- 
ty- and-seven men have died through my act, 
and I have used the sacred bones foully, and 
brought them into imminent peril of total de- 
struction, according to my oath. All this is 
true, my lord. And yet I know not. For 
177 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


Almighty God, whom all we, whether honest 
men or knaves, men of law or lawless, humbly 
worship — Almighty God has His own scales, 
my lord. And I Imow not which thing be in 
those scales the heavier; that twenty-and- 
seven men should die, and that the bones of 
the blessed St. Frisian should be brought in 
peril, ay, or should be utterly destroyed ; or 
again that one weak girl, who has no protec- 
tion save in the justice and pity of men, should 
be denied justice and bereft of pity and that 
no man should hearken to her weeping. Say, 
my lord — for it is yours to teach and mine to 
learn — which of these things should God count 
the greater sin ? And for myself I have asked 
nothing ; and for my friends here, whom I love 
— yes, even those I have killed for my oath’s 
sake, I loved — I have dared to ask nothing. 
But I asked only that justice should be done 
and mercy regarded. Where, my lord, is the 
greater sin ? ” 

But the Archbishop answered not a word to 
Count Antonio ; but he and the Lord Lorenzo 
came and lifted the golden casket, and, no man 
of Antonio’s company seeking to hinder them, 
they went back with it to the city and showed 
it to the people ; and after that the people had 
rejoiced greatly that the sacred bones, which 
178 


THE SACRED BONES 


they had thought to be destroyed, were safe, 
the Archbishop carried the golden casket back 
to the shrine in the village of Rilano, where it 
rests till this day. But Count Antonio buried 
the five men of his band whom he and Bena 
had slain, and with the rest he abode still in 
the hills, while the Lady Lucia dwelt in her 
own house in the city; and the Duke, honour- 
ing the oath which he had sworn before all the 
people, did not seek to constrain her to wed 
any man, and restored to her the estate that 
he had taken from her. Yet the Duke hated 
Count Antonio the more for what he had 
done, and sought the more eagerly how he 
might take him and put him to death. 


179 


CHAPTER VI 


COUNT ANTONIO AND THE HERMIT OF THE VAULT 

Among the stories concerning the Count An- 
tonio which were told to me in answer to my 
questioning (whereof I have rejected many as 
being no better than idle tales), there was one 
that met me often and yet seemed strange 
and impossible to believe; for it was said that 
he had during the time of his outlawry once 
spent several days in the vault of the Pes- 
chetti, and there suffered things that pass 
human understanding. 

This vault lies near to the church of St. John 
the Theologian, in the suburb of Baratesta, on 
the banks of the river; and the Peschetti had 
a palace hard by, and were a family of high 
nobihty, and aUied by blood to the house of 
Monte Velluto. But I could find no warrant 
for the story of Antonio’s sojourn in the vault, 
and although many insisted that the tale was 
true, yet they could not tell how nor why the 
Count came to be in the vault ; until at length 
I chanced on an aged woman who had heard 
the truth of the matter from her grandmother, 
180 


ANTONIO AND THE HERMIT 


and she made me acquainted with the story, 
pouring on me a flood of garrulous gossip, 
from which I have chosen as much as con- 
cerns the purpose. And here I set it down ; 
for I believe it to be true, and I would omit 
nothing that touches the Count, so I can be 
sure that what I write is based on truth. 

When Count Antonio had dwelt in the hills 
for the space of three years and nine months, 
it chanced that Cesare, last of the Peschetti, 
died; and he made a will on his death-bed 
whereby he bequeathed to Count Antonio his 
lands and also a store of money, and many 
ornaments of gold, and jewels; for Antonio’s 
mother had been of the house of the Peschetti, 
and Cesare loved Antonio, although he had 
not dared to give him countenance for fear of 
the Duke’s anger; yet, knowing himself to be 
dying, he bequeathed everything to him, for 
the Duke’s wrath could not hurt a dead man. 
And so soon as he was dead, his steward Giu- 
seppe sent secretly and in haste to Antonio, 
saying, My lord, you cannot take the lands 
or the house; but, if you will be wise, come 
quickly and take the money and the jewels; 
for I hear that His Highness the Duke, de- 
claring that an outlaw has no right and can 
inherit nothing, will send and seize the treas- 
181 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 

lire.” Now Antonio, though grieved at the 
death of Cesare, was glad to hear of the treas- 
ure ; for he was often hard put to it to main- 
tain his company and those who depended on 
him for bread. So he pondered anxiously how 
he might reach the palace of the Peschetti and 
lay hands on the treasure and return safely ; 
for at this time Duke Valentine had posted 
above a hundred of his Guard in the plain, 
and this troop watched all the approaches 
to the hills, so that the band could not ride 
forth in a body unless it were prepared to do 
battle with the guards. Nor did Antonio 
desire to weaken the band, lest the guards, 
learning that the bravest were away, should 
venture an attack. Therefore he would not 
take Tommasino or Bena or any of the stoutest 
with him ; but he took four young men who 
had come to him from Firmola, having fallen 
into the Duke’s displeasure through brawling 
with his guards. These he mounted on good 
horses, and, having made a circuit to avoid the 
encampment in the plain, he came to Cesare’s 
house on the day before that appointed for the 
funeral. Giuseppe came to meet him, and led 
him where the dead man lay, and, after the 
Count had gazed on his face and kissed his 
forehead, they two went to the treasury, and 
182 


ANTONIO AND THE HERMIT 


Giuseppe delivered the treasure to Antonio ; 
and Antonio made him a present of value and 
confirmed him in his stewardship, although it 
was not likely that the Duke would suffer him 
to exercise any power, inasmuch as His High- 
ness had declared his intention of forfeiting the 
estate into his own hand. 

Now it chanced that one of the young men, 
being regaled with wine, drank very freely, and 
began to talk loud and boastfully of his master’s 
achievements as the servants sat under the 
trees in front of the house ; and there was with 
them a certain tailor, a lame man, who had 
furnished mourning garments for the funeral. 
The tailor, learning that Antonio was come, 
said nothing, and seemed not to hear nor un- 
derstand the drunken youth’s talk ; but at an 
early moment he took his departure and 
straightway hobbled as fast as his lame leg 
would let him to the Syndic of Baratesta, a 
very busy and ambitious fellow, who longed 
greatly to win the Duke’s favour. And the 
tailor set the price of five pieces of gold and 
the ordering of a new gown on the news he 
brought ; and the Syndic having agreed, the 
tailor cried, “Antonio of Monte Velluto is at 
the house of the Peschetti, and his band is not 
with him. If you hasten, you may catch him.” 

183 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


At this the Syndic exulted very greatly ; for 
the Duke’s Commissaries would not arrive to 
assume possession of the house in his name till 
the morrow, by which time Antonio would be 
gone; and the Syndic rubbed his hands, say- 
ing, “ If I can take him my glory will be great, 
and the gratitude of His Highness also.” And 
he gathered together all his constables, and 
hard upon twenty discharged soldiers who 
dwelt in the town, and the fifteen men of the 
Duke’s who were stationed at Baratesta to 
gather His Highness’s dues ; and thus, with a 
force of about fifty men, he set out in great 
haste for the house of the Peschetti, and was 
almost come there, before a little boy ran to 
Giuseppe crying that the Syndic and all the 
constables and many besides were coming to 
the house. And Giuseppe, who had but three 
men-servants of an age to fight, the other 
five being old (for Cesare had loved to keep 
those who served him well, even when their 
power grew less than their will), and moreover 
perceived that Antonio’s four were young 
and untried, wrung his hands and hastened 
to the Count with the news, saying, “Yet 
weak as we are, we can die for you, my 
lord.” 

“ Heaven forbid ! ” said Antonio, looking out 
184 


ANTONIO AND THE HERMIT 


of the window. “ Are they all townsmen that 
come with the Syndic ? ” 

“ Alas, no, my lord. There are certain of the 
Duke’s men, and I see among the rest men who 
have spent their days under arms, either in His 
Highness’s service or in Free Companies.” 

Then, ” said Antonio, smiling, “ unless I 
am to share Cesare’s funeral, I had best be 
gone. For I have seen too much fighting to 
be ashamed to run away from it.” 

“ But, my lord, they are at the gates.” 

‘‘ And is there no other gate ? ” 

‘‘ None, my lord, save the little gate in the 
wall there; and see, the Syndic has posted ten 
men there.” 

“ And he will search the house ? ” 

“ I fear that he will, my lord. For he must 
have tidings of your coming.” 

“Then where is my horse?” said Count 
Antonio; and Giuseppe showed him where 
the horse stood in the shadow of the portico. 
“Do not let the Syndic know,” added An- 
tonio, “ that the young men are of my com- 
pany, and send them away in safety.” 

“ But what do you, my lord ? ” cried Giu- 
seppe. 

“What I have done before, Giuseppe. I 
ride for life,” answered the Count, 

185 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 

Then the Count, delaying no more, ran 
lightly down the stairs, leapt on his horse, and, 
drawing his sword, rode forth from the portico ; 
and he was among the Syndic’s company be- 
fore they thought to see him ; and he struck 
right and left with his sword ; and they feU 
back before him in fear, yet striking at him as 
they shrank away; and he had come clean off, 
but for one grizzly-haired fellow who had 
served much in Free Companies and learnt 
cunning; for he stooped low, avoiding the 
sweep of Antonio’s sword, and stabbed the 
horse in its belly, and stood wiping his knife 
and saying, “ My legs are old. I have done 
my part. Do yours; the horse will not go 
far.” In truth the horse was wounded to 
death, and its bowels protruded from the 
wound ; and Antonio felt it falter and stum- 
ble. Yet the gallant beast carried him for half 
a mile, and then he sprang off, fearing it would 
fall under him as he sat and he be crushed 
by it ; and he drew his sword across its throat 
that it might not linger in pain, and then ran 
on foot, hearing the cries of the Syndic’s com- 
pany as it pressed on behind him. And thus, 
running, he came to the church of St. John 
and to the vault of the Peschetti by it; two 
men were at work preparing for Cesare’s fu- 
186 


ANTONIO AND THE HERMIT 


neral, and the door of the vault was open. 
Antonio hurled one man to the right and the 
other to the left, and rushed into the vault; 
for his breath failed, and there was no chance 
for his life were he overtaken in the open; 
and before the men regained their feet, he 
pulled the door of the vault close and sank on 
his knee inside, panting, and holding his sword 
in readiness to slay any who entered. Then 
the Syndic and his company came and called 
on him to surrender. And Antonio cried, 
“ Come and take me.” Then the Syndic bade 
the workmen pull open the door; but An- 
tonio held it with one hand against them both. 
Yet at last they drew it a little open; and 
Antonio lunged with his sword through the 
aperture and wounded the Syndic in the leg, 
so that he stumbled backward with an oath. 
And after that none was willing to enter first, 
until the grizzly-haired fellow came up ; but 
he, seeing the aperture, rushed at it sword in 
hand, fearing no man, not even Count An- 
tonio. But he could not touch Antonio, and 
he also fell back with a sore gash in his cheek ; 
and Antonio laughed, saying, “ Shall I surren- 
der, Syndic ? ” 

Now the Syndic was very urgent in his de- 
sire to take Antonio, but his men shook their 
187 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


heads, and he himself could not stand because 
of the sword-thrust in his leg ; and, instead of 
fighting, his company began to tell of the 
wonderful deeds Antonio had done, and they 
grew no bolder by this ; and the grizzly-haired 
fellow mocked them, saying that he would go 
again at the aperture if two more would at- 
tempt it with him ; but none offered. And 
the Syndic raged and rebuked them, but he 
could not hurt them, being unable to stand 
on his feet; so that one said boldly, “Why 
should we die ? The Duke’s Commissaries 
will be here to-morrow with a company of the 
Guard. Let the Count stay in the vault till 
then. He is in safe keeping; and when he 
sees the Guard he will surrender. It is likely 
enough that a great lord like the Count would 
rather die than give up his sword to the Syn- 
dic.” Whereat the Syndic was very ill pleased, 
but all the rest mighty well pleased ; and, hav- 
ing heard this counsel, they could by no means 
be persuaded to attack afresh, but they let 
Antonio draw the door close again, being in 
truth glad to see the last of his sword. There- 
fore the Syndic, having no choice, set twenty 
to guard the entrance of the vault and pre- 
pared to depart. But he cried to Antonio, 
again bidding him to surrender, for the Guard 
188 


ANTONIO AND THE HERMIT 


would come to-morrow, and then at least he 
could not hope to resist. 

“ Ay, but to-morrow is to-morrow. Master 
Syndic,’' laughed Antonio. “Go, get your 
leg dressed, and leave to-morrow till it dawn.” 

So the Syndic went home and the rest with 
him, leaving the twenty on guard. And to 
this day, if a man hath more love for fighting 
than skill in it, folk call him a Syndic of Bara- 
testa. 

Count Antonio, being thus left in the vault, 
and perceiving that he would not be further 
molested that day, looked round ; and though 
no daylight reached the vault, he could see, 
for the workmen had set a lamp there and it 
still burnt. Around him were the coffins of 
all the Peschetti who had died in five hundred 
years ; and the air was heavy and stifling. 
Antonio took the lamp and walked round the 
vault, which was of circular form; and he 
perceived one coffin standing upright against 
the wall of the vault, as though there had 
been no room for it on the shelves. Then he 
sat down again, and, being weary, leant his 
head against the wall and soon slept; for a 
man whose conscience is easy and whose head 
has sense in it may sleep as well in a vault as 
in a bed-chamber. Yet the air of the vault 
13 189 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


oppressed him, and he slept but lightly and 
uneasily. And, if a proof be needed how le- 
gends gather round the Count s name, I have 
heard many wonderful stories of what hap- 
pened to him in the vault ; how he held con- 
verse with dead Peschetti, how they told him 
things which it is not given to men to know, 
and how a certain beautiful lady, who had 
been dead two hundred years, having been 
slain by her lover in a jealous rage, came forth 
from the coffin, with her hair all dishevelled 
and a great wound yet bleeding in her bosom, 
and sang a low sweet wild love-song to him as 
he lay, and would not leave him though he 
bade her soul rest in the name of Christ and 
the Saints. But that any of these things hap- 
pened I do not believe. 

It was late when the Count awoke, and the 
lamp had burnt out, so that the vault was 
utterly dark. And as the Count roused him- 
self, a sound strange in the place fell on his 
ear ; for a man talked, and his talk was not 
such as one uses who speaks aloud his own 
musings to himself when he is alone (a trick 
men come by who live solitary), but he seemed 
to question others and to answer them, saying, 
“Ay,” and “No,” and “Alas, sweet friend!” 
and so forth, aU in a low even voice; and now 
190 


ANTONIO AND THE HERMIT 


and again he would sigh, and once he laughed 
bitterly. Then the Count raised his voice, 
saying, “ Who is there ? ” And the other 
voice answered, “ Which of you speaks ? The 
tones are not known to me. Yet I know all 
the Peschetti who are here.” And Antonio 
answered, “ I am not of the Peschetti save by 
my mother ; my name is Antonio of Monte 
Velluto.” On this a cry came from the dark- 
ness, as of a man greatly troubled and alarmed ; 
and after that there was silence for a space. 
And Antonio said, “ There is naught to fear; 
I seek to save myself, not to hurt another. 
But how do you, a living man, come to be in 
this vault, and with whom do you speak?” 
Then came the sound of steel striking on a flint, 
and presently a spark, and a torch was lighted ; 
and Antonio beheld before him, in the glow of 
the torch, the flgure of a man who crouched 
on the floor of the vault over against him ; his 
hair was long and tangled, his beard grew to 
his waist, and he was naked save for a cloth 
about his loins ; and his eyes gleamed dark 
and wild as he gazed on Antonio in seeming 
fright and bewilderment. Then the Count, 
knowing that a man collects his thoughts 
while another speaks, told the man who he was 
and how he came there, and (because the man’s 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


eyes still wondered) how that he was an out- 
law these three years and more because he 
would not bow to the Duke’s will ; and when 
he had told all, he ceased. Then the man 
came crawling closer to him, and, holding the 
torch to his face, scanned his face, saying, 
“Surely he is alive!” And again he was 
silent, but after a while he spoke. 

“ For twenty-and-three years,” he said, “ I 
have dwelt here among the dead ; and to the 
dead I talk, and they are my friends and com- 
panions. For I hear their voices, and they 
come out of their coffins and gi-eet me ; yet 
now they are silent and still because you are 
here.” 

“ But how can you live here ? ” cried An- 
tonio. ‘‘ For you must starve for lack of food, 
and come near to suffocation in the air of this 
vault.” 

The man set his hand to his brow and 
frowned, and said sadly, “ Indeed I have for- 
gotten much, yet I remember a certain night 
when the Devil came into me, and in black 
fury and jealousy I laid wait by the door of the 
room where my wife was ; and we had been 
wedded but a few months. There was a man 
who was my friend, and he came to my wife 
secretly, seeking to warn her that I was sus- 
192 


ANTONIO AND THE HERMIT 

pected of treason to the Prince: yes, in all 
things he was my friend ; for when I stabbed 
him as he came to the door, and, rushing in, 
stabbed her also, she did not die till she had 
told me all ; and then she smiled sweetly at 
me, saying, ‘ Our friend will forgive, dear hus- 
band, for you did not know ; and I forgive the 
blow your love dealt me : kiss me and let me 
die here in your arms.’ And I kissed her, and 
she died. Then I laid her on her bed, and I 
went forth from my home ; and I wandered 
many days. Then I sought to kill myself, but 
I could not, for a voice seemed to say, ‘ What 
penitence is there in death ? Lo, it is sweet, 
Paolo ! ’ So I did not kill myself; but I took 
an oath to live apart from men till God should 
in His mercy send me death. And coming in 
my wanderings to the river that runs by Bara- 
testa, I found a little hollow in the bank of the 
river, and I lay down there ; and none pursued 
me, for the Duke of Firmola cared not for a 
crime done in Mantivoglia. And for a year I 
dwelt in my little cave : then it was noised 
about that I dwelt there, and fools began to 
call me, who was the vilest sinner born, a holy 
hermit, and they came to me to ask prayers. 
So I begged from one a pick, and I worked on 
the face of the rock, and made a passage 
193 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


through it. And I swore to look no more on 
the light of the sun, but abode in the recesses 
that I had hollowed out. And I go no more 
to the mouth of the cave, save once a day at 
nightfall, when I drink of the water of the 
river and take the broken meats they leave for 
me.” 

“But here — how came you here?” cried 
Antonio. 

“I broke through one day by chance, as I 
worked on the rock ; and, seeing the vault, I 
made a passage with much labour ; and hav- 
ing done this, I hid it with a coffin ; and now 
I dwell here with the dead, expecting the time 
when in God’s mercy I also shall be allowed to 
die. But to-day I fled back through the pas- 
sage, for men came and opened the vault and 
let in the sunshine, which I might not see. 
Pray for me, sir; I have need of prayers.” 

“ Now God comfort you,” said Count An- 
tonio softly. “Of a truth, sir, a man who 
knows his sin and grieves for it in his heart 
hath in God’s eyes no longer any sin. So is it 
sweetly taught in the most Holy Scriptures. 
Therefore take comfort ; for your friend will 
forgive even as the gentle lady who loved you 
forgave; and Christ has no less forgiveness 
than they.” 


194 


ANTONIO AND THE HERMIT 


“I know not,” said the hermit, groaning 
heavily. “I question the dead who lie here 
concerning these things, but they may not tell 
me.” 

“ Indeed, poor man, they can tell nothing,” 
said Antonio gently ; for he perceived that the 
man was subject to a madness and deluded by 
fancied visions and voices. 

“Yet I love to talk to them of the time 
when I also shall be dead.” 

“ God comfort you,” said Count Antonio 
again. 

Now while Antonio and the hermit talked, 
one of those who guarded the vault chanced to 
lay his ear against the door, listening whether 
Antonio moved, and he heard, to his great 
dread and consternation, the voice of another 
who talked with Antonio : most of what was 
said he did not hear, but he heard Antonio 
say, “ God comfort you,” and the hermit an- 
swer something and groan heavily. And the 
legs of the listener shook under him, and he 
cried to his comrades that the dead talked 
with Antonio, he himself being from fright 
more dead than alive. Then all came and lis- 
tened ; and still the voice of another talked 
with Antonio ; so that the guards were struck 
with terror and looked in one another’s faces, 
195 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 

saying, “ The dead speak ! The Count speaks 
with the dead ! Christ and the Blessed Mother 
of Christ and the Saints protect us ! ” And 
they looked neither to right nor left, but sat 
quaking on the ground about the door of the 
vault; and presently one ran and told the 
Syndic, and he caused himself to be carried 
thither in his chair ; and he also heard, and 
was very greatly afraid, saying, “ This Anto- 
nio of Monte Velluto is a fearful man.” And 
the report spread throughout Baratesta that 
Count Antonio talked with the dead in the 
vault of the Peschetti ; whence came, I doubt 
not, the foolish tales of which I have made 
mention. A seed is enough : men’s tongues 
water it and it grows to a great plant. Nor 
did any man think that it was the hermit who 
talked; for although they knew of his cave, 
they did not know nor imagine of the passage 
he had made, and his voice was utterly strange, 
seeing that he had spoken no word to any liv- 
ing man for twenty years, till he spoke with 
the Count that night. Therefore the whole 
of Baratesta was in great fear ; and they came 
to a certain learned priest, who was priest of 
the church of St. John, and told him. And 
he arose and came in great haste, and offered 
prayers outside the vault, and bade the un- 
196 


ANTONIO AND THE HERMIT 


quiet spirits rest; but he did not offer to enter, 
nor did any one of them; but they all said, 
“We had determined even before to await the 
Duke’s Guard, and that is still the wiser thing.” 

For a great while the hermit could not un- 
derstand what Antonio wanted of him ; for 
his thoughts were on his own state and with 
the dead ; but at length having understood 
that Antonio would be guided through the 
passage and brought to the mouth of the cave, 
in the hope of finding means to escape before 
the Duke’s Commissaries came with the Guard, 
he murmured wonderingly, “ Do you then de- 
sire to live ? ” and rose, and led Antonio where 
the coffin stood upright against the wall as 
Antonio had seen it; but it was now moved a 
little to one side, and there was a narrow open- 
ing, through which the Count had much ado 
to pass; and in his struggles he upset the 
coffin, and it fell with a great crash; whereat 
all who were outside the vault fled suddenly 
to a distance of a hundred yards or more in 
panic, expecting now to see the door of the 
vault open and the dead walk forth : nor could 
they be persuaded to come nearer again. But 
Antonio, with a great effort, made his way 
through the opening, and followed the hermit 
along a narrow rough-hewn way, Antonio’s 
197 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


shoulders grazing the rock on either side as he 
went ; and, having pursued this way for fifteen 
or twenty paces, they turned to the right 
sharply, and went on another ten paces, and, 
having passed through another narrow open- 
ing, were in the cave ; and the river glistened 
before their eyes, for it was now dawn. And 
the hermit, perceiving that it was dawn, and 
fearing to see the sun, turned to flee back to 
the vault; but Antonio, being full of pity for 
him, detained him, and besought him to aban- 
don his manner of life, assuring him that cer- 
tainly by now his sin was purged : and when 
the hermit would not listen, Antonio followed 
him back to the opening that led into the 
vault, and, forgetting his own peril, reasoned 
with him for the space of an hour or more, but 
could not prevail. So at last he bade him fare- 
well very sorrowfully, telling him that God had 
made him that day the instrument of saving a 
man’s life, which should be to him a sign of 
favour and forgiveness ; but the hermit shook 
his head and passed into the vault, and Anta 
nio heard him again talking to the dead Pes- 
chetti, and answering questions that his own 
disordered brain invented. 

Thus it was full morning when Antonio 
came again to the little cave by the river, and 
198 


ANTONIO AND THE HERMIT 

bethought him what he should do for his own 
safety. And suddenly, looking across the 
river, he beheld a gentleman whom he knew, 
one Lepardo, a Commissary of the Duke’s, and 
with him thirty of the Duke’s Guard; and 
they were riding very fast ; for, having started 
at midnight to avoid the heat of the sun (it 
being high summer), so soon as they reached 
the outskirts of Baratesta, they had heard that 
Antonio was in the vault, and were now press- 
ing on to cross the bridge and come upon him. 
And Antonio knew that Lepardo was a man 
of courage and hardihood, and would be pre- 
vented by nothing from entering the vault. 
But on a sudden Lepardo checked his horse, 
uttering a loud cry ; for to his great amaze- 
ment he had seen Antonio as Antonio looked 
forth from the cave, and he could not tell how 
he came to be there : and Antonio at once 
withdrew himself into the shadow of the cave. 
Now the banks of the stream on the side on 
which Lepardo rode were high and precipitous, 
and, although it was summer, yet the stream 
was too deep for him to wade and flowed 
quickly ; yet at Lepardo’s bidding, six of his 
stoutest men prepared to leap down the bank 
and go in search of Antonio; and Antonio, 
discerning that they would do this and blam- 
199 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


ing himself for his rashness in looking out so 
incautiously, was greatly at a loss what to do ; 
for now he was hemmed in on either side ; 
and he saw nothing but to sell his life dearly 
and do some deed that should ornament his 
death. So he retreated again along the pas- 
sage and passed through the opening into the 
vault ; and he summoned the hermit to aid 
him, and between them they set not one only, 
but a dozen of the coffins of the Peschetti 
against the opening, laying them lengthwise and 
piling one on the top of the other, hoping that 
Lepardo’s men would not discover the open- 
ing, or would at least be delayed some time 
before they could thrust away the coffins and 
come through. Then Antonio took his place 
by the gate of the vault again, sword in hand, 
saying grimly to the hermit, ‘‘ If you seek 
Death, sir, he will be hereabouts before long.” 

But the Count Antonio was not a man whom 
his friends would abandon to death unaided ; 
and while the Syndic was watching Antonio, 
the four young men who were with the Count 
made their escape from Cesare’s house; and, 
having separated from one another, rode by 
four different ways towards the hills, using 
much wariness. Yet three of them were 
caught by the Duke’s company that watched 
200 


ANTONIO AND THE HERMIT 

in the plain, and, having been soundly flogged, 
were set to work as servants in the camp. 
But the fourth came safe to the hills, and 
found there Tommasino and Bena ; and Tom- 
masino, hearing of Antonio’s state, started 
with Bena and eighteen more to rescue him or 
die with him. And they fell in with a scout- 
ing party of the Duke’s, and slew every man 
of them to the number of five, losing two of 
their own number ; but thus they escaped, 
there being none left to carry news to the 
camp ; and they rode furiously, and, by the 
time they came near Baratesta, they were not 
more than a mile behind Lepardo’s company. 
But Lepardo, when he had detached the six 
men to watch Antonio, rode on hastily to find 
the Syndic, and learn from him the meaning 
of what he had seen ; and thus Tommasino, 
coming opposite to the mouth of the hermit’s 
cave, saw no more than six horses tethered on 
the river bank, having the Duke’s escutcheon 
wrought on their saddle-cloths. Then he leapt 
down, and, running to the edge of the bank, 
saw a man disappearing into the mouth of the 
cave, dripping wet ; and this man was the last 
of the six who had swum the river, and were 
now groping their way with great caution 
along the narrow track that the hermit had 
201 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


made. Now Tommasino understood no more 
than Lepardo that there was any opening from 
the cave to the vault, but he thought that the 
Duke s men did not swim the river for their 
pleasure, and he bade Bena take five and watch 
what should happen, while he rode on with the 
rest. 

“ If they come out again immediately,” he 
said, ‘‘ you will have them at a disadvantage ; 
but if they do not come out, go in after them ; 
for I know not what they are doing unless 
they are seeking my cousin or laying some 
trap for him.” 

Then Tommasino rode after Lepardo ; and 
Bena, having given the Duke’s men but the 
briefest space in which to come out again from 
the cave, prepared to go after them. And the 
Duke’s men were now much alarmed ; for the 
last man told them of the armed men on 
the bank opposite, and that they did not wear 
the Duke’s badge ; so the six retreated up the 
passage very silently, but they could not find 
any opening, for it grew darker at every step, 
and they became much out of heart. Then 
Bena’s men crossed the river and entered the 
mouth of the cave after them. Thus there 
was fair likelihood of good fighting both in the 
passage and by the gate of the vault. 

202 


ANTONIO AND THE HERMIT 

But the Count Antonio, not knowing that 
any of his band were near, had ceased to hope 
for his life, and he sat calm and ready, sword 
in hand, while the hermit withdrew to a corner 
of the vault, and crouched there muttering his 
mad answers and questions, and ever and 
again hailing some one of the dead Peschetti 
by name as though he saw him. Then sud- 
denly a coffin fell with a loud crash from the 
top of the heap on to the floor ; for the Duke’s 
men had found the opening and were pushing 
at it with hand and shoulder. Antonio sprang 
to his feet and left the gate and went and 
stood ready by the pile of coffins. But again 
on a sudden came a tumult from beyond the 
opening; for Bena and his five also were now 
in the passage, and the foremost of them — 
who indeed was Bena himself — had come upon 
the hindmost of the Duke’s men, and the six, 
finding an enemy behind them, pushed yet 
more fiercely and strenuously against the cof- 
fins. And no man in the passage saw any 
man, it being utterly dark; and they could 
not use their swords for lack of space, but 
drew their daggers and thrust fiercely when 
they felt a man’s body near. So in the dark 
they pushed and wrestled and struggled and 
stabbed, and the sound of their tumult filled 
203 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 

all the vault and spread beyond, being heard 
outside ; and many outside crossed themselves 
for fear, saying, ‘ ‘ Hell is broke loose ! God 
save us ! ” But at that moment came Lepardo 
and his company ; and he, having leapt from 
his horse and heard from the Syndic that An- 
tonio was in very truth in the vault, drew his 
sword and came at the head of his men to the 
door ; and hearing the tumult from within, he 
cried in scorn, “ These are no ghosts ! ” and 
himself with his boldest rushed at the door, 
and they laid hold on the handles of it and 
wrenched it open. But Antonio, perceiving 
that the door was wrenched open, and not yet 
understanding that any of his friends were 
near, suddenly flung himself prone on the 
floor by the wall of the vault, behind two of 
the coffins which the efforts of the Duke’s 
men had dislodged ; and there he lay hidden ; so 
that Lepardo, when he rushed in, saw no man, 
for the corner where the hermit crouched was 
dark ; but the voice of the madman came, 
saying, “ Welcome ! Do you bring me an- 
other of the Peschetti ? He is welcome ! ” 
Then the Duke’s men, having pushed aside 
all the coffins save one, came tumbling and 
scrambling over into the vault, where they 
found Lepardo and his followers ; and hot on 
204 


ANTONIO AND THE HERMIT 


their heels came Bena and his five, so that the 
vault was full of men. And now fi’om out- 
side also came the clatter of hoofs and hoarse 
cries and the clash of steel ; for Tommasino 
had come, and had fallen with great fury on 
those of Lepardo’s men who were outside and 
on the Syndic’s levies that watched from afar 
off. And fierce was the battle outside; yet 
it was fiercer inside, where men fought in a 
half-hght, scarcely knowing with whom they 
fought, and tripping hither and thither over 
the coffins of the Peschetti that were strewn 
about the floor. 

Then the Count Antonio arose from where 
he lay and he cried aloud, “ To me, to me ! 
To me, Antonio of Monte Velluto 1” and he 
rushed to the entrance of the vault. Bena, 
hailing the Count’s voice, and cutting down 
one who barred the way, ran to Antonio in 
great joy to find him alive and whole. And 
Antonio came at Lepardo, who stood his on- 
set bravely, although greatly bewildered to 
find a party of Antonio’s men where he had 
looked for Antonio alone. And he cried to 
his men to rally round him, and, keeping 
his face and his blade towards the Count, 
began to fall back towards the mouth of 
the vault, in order to rejoin his men out- 
14 205 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


side; for there also he perceived that there 
was an enemy. Thus Lepardo fell back, and 
Antonio pressed on. But, unnoticed by any, 
the mad hermit now sprang forth from the 
corner where he had been; and, as Antonio 
was about to thrust at Lepardo, the hermit 
caught him by the arm, and with the strength 
of frenzy drew him back, and thrust himself 
forward, running even on the point of Lepar- 
do’s sword that was ready for Count Antonio ; 
and the sword of Lepardo passed through the 
breast of the hermit of the vault, and protrud- 
ed behind his back between the shoulders; 
and he fell prone on the floor of the vault, 
crying exultantly, “ Death ! Thanks be to 
God, death I ” And then and there he died 
of the thrust that Lepardo gave him. But 
Antonio with Bena and three more — for two 
of Bena’s five were slain — drove Lepardo and 
his men back before them, and thus won their 
way to the gate of the vault, where, to their 
joy, they found that Tommasino more than 
held his own; for he had scattered Lepardo ’s 
men, and the Syndic’s were in full flight, save 
eight or ten of the old soldiers who had served 
in Free Companies; and these stood in a 
group, their swords in their right hands and 
daggers in the left, determined to die dearly ; 

206 


ANTONIO AND THE HERMIT 

and the grizzly-haired fellow who had killed 
Antonio’s horse had assumed command of 
them. 

“ Here are some fellows worth fighting, my 
lord,” said Bena to Tommasino joyfully. “ Let 
us meet them, my lord, man for man, an equal 
number of us.” For although Bena had killed 
one man and maimed another in the vault, he 
saw no reason for staying his hand. 

“ Ay, Bena,” laughed Tommasino. “ These 
fellows deserve to die at the hands of men 
like us.” 

But while they prepared to attack, Antonio 
cried suddenly, “ Let them be ! There are 
enough men dead over this matter of Cesare’s 
treasure.” And he compelled Tommasino and 
Bena to come with him, although they were 
very reluctant ; and they seized horses that had 
belonged to Lepardo’s men ; and, one of Tom- 
masino’s men also being dead, Bena took his 
horse. Then Antonio said to the men of the 
Free Companies, “ What is your quarrel with 
me? I do but take what is mine. Go in 
peace. This Syndic is no master of yours.” 
But the men shook their heads and stood their 
ground. Then Antonio turned and rode to 
the entrance of the vault where his band was 
now besieging Lepardo, and he cried to Le- 
207 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


pardo, “Confer with me, sir. You can come 
forth safely.” And Lepardo came out from 
the vault, having lost there no fewer than five 
men, and having others wounded ; and he was 
himself wounded in his right arm and could 
not hold his sword. Then the Count said to 
him, “ Sir, it is no shame for a man to yield 
when fortune is against him. And I trust that 
I am one to whom a gentleman may yield 
without shame. See, the Syndic’s men are 
fled, and yours are scattered, and these men, 
who stand bravely together, are not enough to 
resist me.” 

And Lepardo answered sadly — for he was 
very sorry that he had failed to take Antonio — 
“ Indeed, my lord, we are worsted. For we 
are not ten men against one, as I think they 
should be who seek to overcome my lord An- 
tonio.” 

To this Antonio bowed most courteously, 
saying, “ Nay, it is rather fortune, sir.” 

And Lepardo said, “ Yet we can die, in case 
you put unseemly conditions on us, my lord.” 

“ There is no condition save that you fight 
no more against me to-day,” said Antonio. 

“ So let it be, my lord,” said Lepardo ; and 
to this the men of the Free Companies also 
agreed, and they mingled with Antonio s band, 
208 


ANTONIO AND THE HERMIT 


and two of them joined themselves to Antonio 
that day, and were with him henceforward, one 
being afterwards slain on Mount Agnino, and 
the other preserving his life through all the 
perils that beset the Count’s company. 

Then Antonio went back to the house of 
Cesare, and brought forth the body of Cesare, 
and, having come to the vault, he caused those 
who had been slain to be carried out, and set 
the coffins again in decent order, and laid 
Cesare, the last of the house, there. But when 
the corpse of the hermit was brought out, all 
marvelled very greatly, and had much compas- 
sion for him when they heard from the lips of 
Count Antonio his pitiful story ; and Antonio 
bestowed out of the moneys that he had from 
Cesare a large sum that masses might be said 
for the soul of the hermit. “ For of a surety,” 
said the Count, “it was Heaven’s will that 
through his misfortune and the strange mad- 
ness that came upon him my life should be 
saved.” 

These things done, Antonio gathered his 
band, and, having taken farewell of Lepardo 
and commended him for the valour of his 
struggle, prepared to ride back to the hills. 
And his face was grave, for he was consider- 
ing earnestly how he should escape the hun- 
209 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


dred men who lay watching for him in the 
plain. But while he considered, Tommasino 
came to him and said, ‘‘ All Baratesta is ours, 
cousin. Cannot we get a change of coat, and 
thus ride with less notice from the Duke’s 
camp ? ” And Antonio laughed also, and they 
sent and caught tw^enty men of Baratesta, 
grave merchants and petty traders, and among 
them Bena laid hold of the Syndic, and 
brought him in his chair to Antonio ; and the 
Count said to the Syndic, “ It is ill meddling 
with the affairs of better men. Master Syndic. 
Off with that gown of yours ! ” 

And they stripped the Syndic of his gown, 
and Antonio put on the gown. Thus the 
Syndic had need very speedily of the new 
gown which he had contracted to purchase of 
the lame tailor as the price of the tailor’s in- 
formation. And all Antonio’s men clothed 
themselves like merchants and traders, An- 
tonio in the Syndic’s gown taking his place at 
their head ; and thus soberly attired, they rode 
out soberly from Baratesta, neither Lepardo 
nor any of his men being able to restrain them- 
selves from laughter to see them go ; and most 
strange of all was Bena, who wore an old man’s 
gown of red cloth trimmed with fur. 

It was now noon, and the band rode slowly, 
210 


ANTONIO AND THE HERMIT 


for the sun was very hot, and several times 
they paused to take shelter under clumps of 
trees, so that the afternoon waned before they 
came in sight of the Duke’s encampment. 
Soon then they were seen in their turn ; and a 
young officer of the Guard with three men 
came pricking towards them to learn their 
business ; and Antonio hunched the Syndic’s 
gown about his neck and pulled his cap down 
over his eyes, and thus received the officer. 
And the officer was deluded and did not know 
him, but said, ‘‘ Is there news. Syndic ? ” 

“Yes, there is news,” said Antonio. “The 
hermit of the vault of the Peschetti is dead at 
Baratesta.” 

“ I know naught of him,” said the officer. 

By this time Antonio’s men had all crowded 
round the officer and his companions, hem- 
ming them in on every side ; and those that 
watched from the Duke’s camp saw the mer- 
chants and traders flocking round the officer, 
and said to themselves, “ They are offering 
wares to him.” But Antonio said, “ How, 
sir ? You have never heard of the hermit of 
the vault ? ” 

“ I have not. Syndic,” said the officer. 

“ He was a man, sir,” said Antonio, “who 
dwelt with the dead in a vault, and was so 
211 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


enamoured of death, that he greeted it as a 
man greets a dear friend who has tarried over- 
long in coming.” 

“ In truth, a strange mood ! ” cried the 
officer. ‘‘ I think this hermit was mad.” 

‘‘ I also think so,” said Antonio. 

I cannot doubt of it,” cried the officer. 

‘‘ Then, sir, you are not of his mind ? ” asked 
Antonio, smiling. “ You would not sleep this 
night with the dead, nor hold out your hands 
to death as to a dear friend ? ” 

“ By St. Frisian, no,” said the young officer 
with a laugh. “ For this world is well enough, 
Syndic, and I have sundry trifling sins that I 
would be quit of, before I face another.” 

“ If that be so, sir,” said Antonio, “ return 
to him who sent you, and say that the Syndic 
of Baratesta rides here with a company of 
friends and that his business is lawful and open 
to no suspicion.” And even as Antonio spoke, 
every man drew his dagger, and there were 
three daggers at the heart of the officer and 
three at the heart of each of the men with 
him. “For by saying this,” continued the 
Count, fixing his eyes on the officer, “ and by 
no other means can you escape immediate 
death.” 

Then the officer looked to right and left, 
212 


ANTONIO AND THE HERMIT 


being very much bewildered ; but Tommasino 
touched him on the arm and said, “ You have 
fallen, sir, into the hands of the Count An- 
tonio. Take an oath to do as he bids you, 
and save your life.” And Antonio took off 
the Syndic’s cap and showed his face ; and 
Bena rolled up the sleeve of his old man’s 
gown and showed the muscles of his arm. 

“ The Count Antonio ! ” cried the officer 
and his men in great dismay. 

“Yes; and w^e are four to one,” said Tom- 
masino. “You have no choice, sir, between 
the oath and immediate death. And it seems 
to me that you are indeed not of the mind of 
the hermit of the vault.” 

But the officer cried, “ My honour will not 
suffer this oath, my lord.” And, hearing this, 
Bena advanced his dagger. 

But Antonio smiled again and said, “Then 
I will not force it on you, sir. But this much 
I must force on you — to swear to abide here 
for half-an-hour, and during that time to send 
no word and make no sign to your camp.” 

To this the officer, having no choice between 
it and death, agreed; and Antonio, leaving 
him, rode forward softly; and, riding softly, 
he passed within half-a-mile of the Duke’s en- 
campment. But at this moment the officer, 
213 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 

seeing Antonio far away, broke his oath, and 
shouted loudly, “ It is Antonio of Monte Vel- 
luto ; ” and set spurs to his horse. Then An- 
tonio’s brow grew dark and he said, ‘ ‘ Ride on 
swiftly, all of you, to the hills, and leave me 
here.” 

“ My lord I ” said Tommasino, beseeching 
him. 

“Ride on! ’’said Antonio sternly. “Ride 
at a gallop. You will draw them off from 
me.” 

And they dared not disobey him, but all 
rode on. And now there was a stir in the 
Duke’s camp, men running for their arms and 
their horses. But Antonio’s band set them- 
selves to a gallop, making straight for the 
hills ; and the commander of the Duke’s 
Guard did not know what to make of the 
matter ; for he had heard the officer cry “ An- 
tonio,” but did not understand what he meant ; 
therefore there was a short delay before the 
pursuit after the band was afoot ; and the 
band thus gained an advantage, and Antonio 
turned away, saying, “It is enough. They 
will come safe to the hills.” 

But he himself drew his sword and set spurs 
to his horse, and he rode towards where the 
young officer was. And at first the officer 
214 


ANTONIO AND THE HERMIT 


came boldly to meet him ; then he wavered, 
and his cheek went pale ; and he said to the 
men who rode with him, “ We are four to one.” 

But one of them answered, “ Four to two, 
sir.” 

What do you mean ? ” cried the officer. 
“ I see none coming towards us but Count 
Antonio himself.” 

“ Is not God also against oath-breakers ? ” 
said the fellow, and he looked at his comrades. 
And they nodded their heads to him ; for they 
were afraid to fight by the side of a man who 
had broken his oath. Moreover the figure of 
the Count was very terrible; and the three 
turned aside and left the young officer alone. 

Now by this time the whole of the Duke’s 
encampment was astir ; but they followed not 
after Antonio, but after Tommasino and the 
rest of the band ; for they did not know An- 
tonio in the Syndic’s gown. Thus the young 
officer was left alone to meet Antonio ; and 
when he saw this his heart failed him and his 
courage sank, and he dared not await Anto- 
nio, but he turned and set spurs to his horse, 
and fled away from Antonio across the plain. 
And Antonio pursued after him, and was now 
very near upon him ; so that the officer saw 
that he would soon be overtaken, and the 
215 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


reins fell from his hand and he sat on his horse 
like a man smitten with a palsy, shaking and 
trembling : and his horse, being unguided, 
stumbled as it went, and the officer fell off 
from it ; and he lay very still on the ground. 
Then Count Antonio came up where the offi- 
cer was, and sat on his horse, holding his 
drawn sword in his hand; and in an instant 
the officer began to raise himself ; and, when 
he stood up, he saw Antonio with his sword 
drawn. And Antonio said, “ Shall men with- 
out honour live ? ” 

Then the officer gazed into the eyes of the 
Count Antonio ; and the sweat burst forth on 
his forehead. A sudden strange choking cry 
came from him; he dropped his sword from 
his hand, and with both hands he suddenly 
clasped his heart, uttering now a great cry of 
pain and having his face wrung with agony. 
Thus he stood for an instant, clutching his 
heart with both his hands, his mouth twisted 
fearfully, and then he dropped on to the 
ground and lay still. And the Count Anto- 
nio sheathed his sword, and bared his head, 
saying, ‘Ht is not my sword, but God’s.” 

And he turned and put his horse to a gallop 
and rode away, not seeking to pass the Duke’s 
encampment, but directing his way towards 
216 


ANTONIO AND THE HERMIT 


the village of Rilano ; and there he found shel- 
ter in the house of a friend for some hours, and 
when night fell, made his way safely back to 
the hills, and found that the Duke’s men had 
abandoned the pursuit of his company and 
that all of them were alive and safe. 

But when they came to take up the young 
officer who had been false to his oath, he was 
dead; whether from fright at the aspect of 
Count Antonio and the imminent doom with 
which he was threatened, or by some imme- 
diate judgment of Heaven, I know not. For 
very various are the dealings of God with 
man. For one crime He will slay and tarry 
not, and so, perchance, was it meted out to 
that officer; but with another man His way 
is different, and He suffers him to hve long 
days, mindful of his sin, in self-hatred and self- 
scorn, and will not send him the relief of death, 
how much soever the wretch may pray for it. 
Thus it was that God dealt with the hermit of 
the vault of the Peschetti, who did not find 
death till he had sought it for twenty-and- 
three years. I doubt not that in all there is 
purpose; even as was shown in the manner 
wherein the hermit, being himself bound and 
tied to a miserable life, was an instrument in 
saving the life of Count Antonio. 

217 


CHAPTER VII 


COUNT ANTONIO AND THE LADY OF RILANO 

From the lips of Tommasino himself, who 
was cousin to Count Antonio, greatly loved 
by him, and partaker of all his enterprises dur- 
ing the time of his sojourn as an outlaw in the 
hills, this, the story of the Lady of Rilano, 
came to my venerable brother in Christ, Nic- 
colo; and the same Niccolo, being a very old 
man, told it to me, so that I know that the 
story is true and every part of it, and tread 
here not on the doubtful ground of legend, 
but on the firm rock of the word of honest 
men. There is indeed one thing doubtful, 
Tommasino himself being unable to know the 
verity of it; yet that one thing is of small 
moment, for it is no more than whether the 
lady came first to Duke Valentine, offering 
her aid, or whether the Duke, who since the 
affair of the sacred bones had been ever active 
in laying schemes against Antonio, cast his 
eyes on the lady, and, perceiving that she was 
very fair and likely to serve his turn, sent for 
her, and persuaded her by gifts and by the 
218 


ANTONIO AND LADY OF RILANO 


promise of a great marriage to take the task 
in hand. 

Be that as it may, it is certain that in the 
fourth year of Count Antonio s outlawry, the 
Lady Venusta came from Rilano, where she 
dwelt, and talked alone with the Duke in his 
cabinet ; so that men, and women with greater 
urgency, asked what His Highness did to take 
such an one into his counsels ; for he had him- 
self forbidden her to live in the city and con- 
strained her to abide in her house at Rilano, 
by reason of reports touching her fair fame. 
Nor did she then stay in Firmola, but, having 
had audience of the Duke, returned straight- 
way to Rilano, and for the space of three 
weeks rested there; and the Duke told noth- 
ing to his lords of what had passed between 
him and the lady, while the Count Antonio 
and his friends knew not so much as that the 
Duke had held conference with the lady; for 
great penalties had been decreed against any 
man who sent word to Antonio of what passed 
in Firmola, and the pikemen kept strict guard 
on all who left or entered the city, so that it 
was rather like a town besieged than the chief 
place of a peaceful realm. 

Now at this time, considering that his hiding- 
place was too well known to the lord Lorenzo 
219 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


and certain of the Duke’s Guard, Count An- 
tonio descended from the hills by night, and, 
having erossed the plain, carrying all his 
equipment with him, mounted again into the 
heights of Mount Agnino and pitched his camp 
in and about a certain cave, which is protected 
on two sides by high rocks and on the third 
by the steep banks of a river, and can be ap- 
proached by one path only. This cave was 
known to the Duke, but he could not force it 
without great loss, so that Antonio was well 
nigh as safe as when his hiding-place had been 
unknown ; and yet he was nearer by half to 
the city, and but seven miles as a bird flies 
from the village of Rilano where the Lady 
Venusta dwelt; although to one who travelled 
by the only path that a man could go upright 
on his feet the distance was hard on eleven 
miles. But no other place was so near, and 
from Rilano Antonio drew the better part of 
the provisions and stores of which he had need, 
procuring them secretly from the people, who 
were very strictly enjoined by the Duke to 
furnish him with nothing under pain of for- 
feiture of all their goods. 

Yet one day, when the man they call Bena 
and a dozen more rode in the evening through 
Rilano, returning towards the cave, the maid- 
220 


ANTONIO AND LADY OF RILANO 


servant of Venusta met them, and, with her, 
men bearing a great cask of fine wine, and the 
maid-servant said to Bena, “ My mistress bids 
you drink ; for good men should not suffer 
thirst.” 

But Bena answered her, asking, “ Do you 
know who we are ? ” 

“ Ay, I know, and my lady knows,” said the 
girl. “ But my lady says that if she must live 
at Rilano, then she will do what she pleases in 
Rilano.” 

Bena and his men looked at one another, for 
they knew of His Highness’s proclamation, 
but the day having been hot, they being weary, 
the wine seeming good, and a woman knowing 
her own business best, at last they drank 
heartily, and, rendering much thanks, rode on 
and told Tommasino what had been done. 
And Tommasino having told Antonio, the 
Count was angry with Bena, saying that his 
gluttony would bring trouble on the Lady 
Venusta. 

‘‘ She should not tempt a man,” said Bena 
sullenly. 

All these things happened on the second day 
of the week ; and on the fourth, towards even- 
ing, as Antonio and Tommasino sat in front of 
the cave, they saw coming towards them one of 
15 221 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


the band named Luigi, a big fellow who had 
done good service and was also a merry jovial 
man that took the lead in good-fellowship. 
And in his arms Luigi bore the Lady Venusta. 
Her gown was dishevelled and torn, and the 
velvet shoes on her feet were cut almost to 
shreds, and she lay back in Luigi s arms, pale 
and exhausted. Luigi came and set her down 
gently before Antonio, saying, ‘ ‘ My lord, three 
miles from here, in the steepest and roughest 
part of the way, I found this lady sunk on the 
ground and half-swooning; when I raised her 
and asked how she came where she was, and in 
such a plight, she could answer nothing save, 
‘ Count Antonio ! Carry me to Count An- 
tonio ! ’ So I have brought her in obedience 
to her request.” 

As Luigi ended, Venusta opened her eyes, 
and, rising to her knees, held out her hands in 
supplication, saying, “Protect me, my lord, 
protect me. For the Duke has sent me word 
that to-morrow night he will burn my house 
and all that it holds, and will take me and 
lodge me in prison, and so use me there that I 
may know what befalls those who give aid to 
traitors. And all this comes upon me, my lord, 
because I gave a draught of wine to your men 
when they were thirsty.” 

222 


ANTONIO AND LADY OF RILANO 

“I feared this thing,” said Antonio, “and 
deeply I grieve at it. But I am loth to go in 
open war against the Duke ; moreover in the 
plain he would be too strong for me. What 
then can I do ? For here is no place in which 
a lady, the more if she be alone and unattended, 
can be lodged with seemliness.” 

“ If the choice be between this and a prison 

” said Venusta with a faint sorrowful 

smile. 

“ Yet it might be that I could convey you 
beyond His Highness’s power,” pursued An- 
tonio. “ But I fear you could not travel far 
to-night.” 

“ Indeed I am weary even to death,” moaned 
Venusta. 

“ There is nothing for it but that to-night 
at least she rest here,” said Antonio to Tom- 
masino. 

Tommasino frowned. “When woman comes 
in,” said he behind the screen of his hand, 
“ safety flies out.” 

“ Better fly safety than courtesy and kind- 
ness, cousin,” said Count Antonio, and Tom- 
masino ceased to dissuade him, although he 
was uneasy concerning the coming of Venusta. 

That night, therefore, all made their camp 
outside, and gave the cave to Venusta for her 
223 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


use, having made a curtain of green boughs 
across its mouth. But again the next day 
Venusta was too sick for travel; nay, she 
seemed very sick, and she prayed Luigi to go 
to Rilano and seek a physician; and Luigi, 
Antonio having granted him permission, went, 
and returned saying that no physician dared 
come in face of His Highness’s proclamation ; 
but the truth was that Luigi was in the pay of 
Venusta and of the Duke, and had sought by his 
journey not a physician, but means of inform- 
ing the Duke how Venusta had sped, and of 
seeking counsel from him as to what should 
next be done. And that day and for four 
days more Venusta abode in the cave, protest- 
ing that she could not travel; and Antonio 
used her with great courtesy, above all when 
he heard that the Duke, having stayed to 
muster all his force for fear of Antonio, had at 
length appointed the next day for the burning 
of her house at Rilano and the carrying off of 
all her goods. These tidings he gave her, and 
though he spoke gently, she fell at once into 
great distress, declaring that she had not be- 
lieved the Duke would carry out his purpose, 
and weeping for her jewels and prized posses- 
sions which were in the house. 

Now Count Antonio, though no true man 

224 


ANTONIO AND LADY OF RILANO 


could call him fool, had yet a simplicity nobler 
it may be than the suspicious wisdom of those 
who, reading other hearts by their own, count 
all men rogues and all women wanton : and 
when he saw the lady weeping for the trinkets 
and her loved toys and trifles, he said, “Nay, 
though I cannot meet the Duke face to face, 
yet I will ride now and come there before 
him, and bring what you value most from the 
house.” 

“ You will be taken,” said she, and she gazed 
at him with timid admiring eyes. “I had 
rather a thousand times lose the jewels than 
that you should run into danger, my lord. 
For I owe to you hberty, and perhaps life.” 

“ I will leave Tommasino to guard you and 
ride at once,” and Antonio rose to his feet, 
smiling at her for her foolish fears. 

Then a thing that seemed strange happened. 
For Antonio gave a sudden cry of pain. And 
behold, he had set his foot on the point of a 
dagger that was on the ground near to the 
Lady Venusta; and the dagger ran deep into 
his foot, for it was resting on a stone and the 
point sloped upwards, so that he trod full and 
with all his weight on the point; and he sank 
back on the ground with the dagger in his 
foot. How came the dagger there? How 
225 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


came it to rest against the stone ? None could 
tell then, though it seems plain to him that 
considers now. None then thought that the 
lady who fled to Antonio as though he were 
her lover, and lavished tears and sighs on him, 
had placed it there. Nor that honest Luigi, 
who made such moan of his carelessness in 
dropping his poniard, had taken more pains 
over the losing of his weapon than most men 
over the preservation of theirs. Luigi cursed 
himself, and the lady cried out on fate; and 
Count Antonio consoled both of them, saying 
that the wound would soon be well, and that 
it was too light a matter for a lady to dim her 
bright eyes for the sake of it. 

Yet light as the matter was, it was enough 
for Venusta’s purpose and for the scheme of 
Duke Valentine. For Count Antonio could 
neither mount his horse nor go afoot to Ve- 
nusta’s house in Rilano; and, if the jewels were 
to be saved and the lady’s tears dried (mightily, 
she declared with pretty self-reproach, was she 
ashamed to think of the jewels beside Antonio’s 
hurt, but yet they were dear to her), then 
Tommasino must go in his place to Rilano. 

“ And take all save Bena and two more,” 
said Antonio. “ For the Duke will not come 
here, if he goes to Rilano.” 

226 


ANTONIO AND LADY OF RILANO 


“ I,” said Bena, ‘‘ am neither nurse nor phy- 
sician nor woman. Let Martolo stay; he says 
there is already too much blood on his con- 
science; and let me go, for there is not so 
much as I could bear on mine, and maybe we 
shall have a chance of an encounter with the 
foreguard of the Duke.” 

But Venusta said to Antonio, “ Let both of 
these men go, and let Luigi stay. For he is a 
clever fellow, and will aid me in tending your 
wound.” 

“ So be it,” said Antonio. ‘‘ Let Luigi and 
the two youngest stay ; and do the rest of you 
go, and return as speedily as you may. And 
the Lady Venusta shall, of her great goodness, 
dress my wound, which pains me more than 
such a trifle should.” 

Thus the whole band, saving Luigi and two 
youths, rode off early in the morning with 
Tommasino, their intent being to reach Ri- 
lano and get clear of it again before the Duke 
came thither from the city : and Venusta sent 
no message to the Duke, seeing that all had 
fallen out most prosperously and as had been 
arranged between them. For the Duke was 
not in truth minded to go at all to Rilano; 
but at earliest dawn, before Tommasino had 
set forth, the lord Lorenzo left the city with 
227 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


a hundred pikemen ; more he would not take, 
fearing to be delayed if his troop were too 
large; and he made a great circuit, avoiding 
Rilano and the country adjacent to it. So 
that by mid-day Tommasino was come with 
thirty-and-four men (the whole strength of 
the band except the three with Antonio) to 
Rilano, and, meeting with no resistance, en- 
tered Venusta’s house, and took all that was 
precious in it, and loaded their horses with 
the rich tapestries and the choicest of the fur- 
nishings ; and then, having regaled themselves 
with good cheer, started in the afternoon to 
ride back to the cave, Tommasino and Bena 
grumbling to one another because they had 
chanced on no fighting, but not daring to 
tarry by reason of Antonio’s orders. 

But their lamentations were without need ; 
for when they came to the pass of Mount 
Agnino, there at the entrance of the road 
which led up to the cave, by the side of the 
river, was encamped a force of eighty pikemen 
under the Lieutenant of the Guard. Thus 
skilfully had the lord Lorenzo performed his 
duty, and cut off Tommasino and his com- 
pany from all access to the cave ; and now he 
himself was gone with twenty men up the 
mountain path, to take Antonio according to 
228 


ANTONIO AND LADY OF RILANO 


the scheme of the Duke and the Lady Ve- 
nusta. But Bena and Tommasino were sore 
aghast, and said to one another, “ There is 
treachery. What are we to do?” For the 
eighty of the Duke’s men were posted strongly, 
and it was a great hazard to attack them. Yet 
this risk they would have run, for they were 
ready rather to die than to sit there idle while 
Antonio was taken ; and in all likelihood they 
would have died, had the Lieutenant obeyed 
the orders which Lorenzo had given him and 
rested where he was, covered by the hill and 
the river. But the Lieutenant was a young 
man, of hot temper and impetuous, and to his 
mistaken pride it seemed as though it were 
cowardice for eighty men to shrink from at- 
tacking thirty- and-five, and for the Duke’s 
Guards to play for adv^antage in a contest 
with a band of robbers. Moreover Tomma- 
sino’s men taunted his men, crying to them to 
come down and fight like men in the open. 
Therefore, counting on a sure victory and the 
pardon it would gain, about three o’clock in 
the afternoon he cried, “ Let us have at these 
rascals ! ” and to Tommasino’s great joy, his 
troop remounted their horses and made ready 
to charge from their position. Then Tom- 
masino said, “We are all ready to face the 
229 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


enemy for my lord and cousin’s sake. But I 
have need now of those who will run away for 
his sake.” 

Then he laid his plans that when the Lieu- 
tenant’s troop charged, his men should not 
stand their ground. And five men he placed 
on one extremity of his line, Bena at their 
head ; and four others with himself he posted 
at the other extremity; also he spread out 
his line very wide, so that it stretched on 
either side beyond the line of the Lieutenant. 
And he bade the twenty-and-five in the centre 
not abide the onset, but turn and fiee at a 
gallop, trusting to the speed of their horses for 
escape. And he made them fling away all that 
they had brought from the Lady Venusta’s 
house, that they might ride the lighter. 

“And I pray God,” said he, “that you will 
escape alive ; but if you do not, it is only what 
your oath to my lord constrains you to. But 
you and I, Bena, with our men, will ride, not 
baek towards the plain, but on towards the 
hills, and it may be that we shall thus get 
ahead of the Lieutenant; and onee we are 
ahead of him in the hilly ground, he will not 
catch us before we come to the cave.” 

“Unless,” began Bena, “there be another 
party ” 


230 


ANTONIO AND LADY OF RILANO 


“ Hist ! ” said Tommasino, and he whispered 
to Bena, “They will fear if they hear all.” 

Then the Duke’s men came forth, and it fell 
out as Tommasino had planned ; for the body 
of the Duke’s men, when they saw Tomma- 
sino’s rank broken and his band flying, set up 
a great shout of scorn and triumph, and dug 
spurs into their horses and pursued the runa- 
ways. And the runaways rode at their top 
speed, and, having come nearly to Rilano 
without being caught, they were three of them 
overtaken and captured by the well at the en- 
trance to the village ; but the rest, wheeling to 
the right, dashed across the plain, making for 
Antonio’s old hiding-place ; and, having lost 
two more of their number whose horses failed, 
and having slain four of the Guard who pur- 
sued incautiously ahead of the rest, they reached 
the spurs of the hills, and there scattered, every 
man by himself, and found refuge, some in the 
woods, some in shepherds’ huts ; so they came 
off with their lives. But the men with Tom- 
masino and Bena had ridden straight for the 
hill-road, and had passed the Lieutenant be- 
fore he apprehended Tommasino’s scheme. 
Then he cried aloud to his men, and eight of 
them, hearing him, checked their horses, but 
could not understand what he desired of them 
231 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


till he cried aloud again, and pointed with his 
hand towards where the ten, Tommasino lead- 
ing and Bena in the rear, had gained the hill- 
road and were riding up it as swiftly as their 
horses could mount. Then the Lieutenant, 
cursing his own folly, gathered them, and they 
rode after Tommasino and Bena. 

“Be of good heart,” said the Lieutenant. 
“They are between us and the company of 
my lord Lorenzo.” 

Yet though he said this, his mind was not at 
ease; for the horses of his men, being unac- 
customed to the hills, could not mount the 
road as did the sure-footed mountain-horses 
ridden by Tommasino’s company, and the 
space widened between them ; and at last 
Tommasino’s company disappeared from sight, 
at the point where the track turned sharp to 
the left, round a great jutting rock that stood 
across the way and left room for but three men 
to ride abreast between river and rock. Then 
the Lieutenant drew rein and took counsel 
with his men, for he feared that Tommasino 
would wait for him behind the jutting rock 
and dash out on his flank as he rode round. 
Therefore for a while he considered, and a 
while longer he allowed for the breathing of 
the horses ; and then with great caution rode 
232 


ANTONIO AND LADY OF RILANO 

on towards the jutting rock, which lay about 
the half of a mile from him. And when he 
came near it, he and his men heard a voice 
cry, “ Quiet, quiet ! They are close now! ” 

‘‘ They will dash at us as we go round,” said 
the Lieutenant. 

“And we can go no more than three to- 
gether,” said one of the guards. 

“ Are you all ready ? ” said the voice behind 
the cliff, in accents that but just reached round 
the rock. “Not a sound, for your lives!” 
Yet a sound there was, as of a jingling bit, 
and then again an angry “Curse you, you 
clumsy fool, be still.” And then aU was still. 

“They are ready for us now,” whispered a 
guard, with an uneasy smile. 

‘ ‘ I will go,” said the Lieutenant. “ Which 
two of you will lead the way with me ? ” 

But the men grumbled, saying, “ It is the 
way to death that you ask us to lead, sir.” 

Then the Lieutenant drew his men back, 
and as they retreated they made a great noise, 
hoping to make Tommasino think they were 
gone. And, having thus withdrawn some five 
hundred paces, they rested in utter quiet for 
half an hour. And it was then late afternoon. 
And the Lieutenant said, “ I will go first 
alone, and in all likelihood I shall be slain; 

233 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


but do you foUow immediately after me and 
avenge my death.” And this they, being 
ashamed for their first refusal, promised to do. 
Then the Lieutenant rode softly forward till 
he came within twenty yards of the rock, and 
he clapped spurs to his horse and shouted, and, 
followed close by his men crying, “ For God 
and our Duke ! ” charged round the jutting 
rock. 

And behold, on the other side of it was not 
a man ! And of Tommasino and his company 
naught was to be seen — for they had used the 
last hour to put a great distance between them 
and their pursuers — save that away, far up the 
road, in the waning light of the sun, was to be 
dimly perceived the figure of a man on horse- 
back, who waved his hat to them and, turning, 
was in an instant lost to view. And this man 
was Bena, who, by himself and without a blow, 
had held the passage of the jutting rock for 
hard on an hour, and thus given time to 
Tommasino to ride on and come upon the 
rear of Lorenzo’s company before the Lieu- 
tenant and his men could hem them in on 
the other side. 

Thus had the day worn to evening, and long 
had the day seemed to Antonio, who sat 
before the mouth of the cave, with Venusta by 
234 


ANTONIO AND LADY OF RILANO 


his side. All day they had sat thus alone, for 
Luigi and the two youths had gone to set 
snares in the wood behind the cave — or such 
was the pretext Luigi made ; and Antonio had 
let them go, charging them to keep in earshot. 
As the long day passed, Antonio, seeking to 
entertain the lady and find amusement for her 
through the hours, began to recount to her all 
that he had done, how he had seized the Sacred 
Bones, the manner of his difference with the 
Abbot of St. Frisian, and much else. But of 
the killing of Duke Paul he would not speak ; 
nor did he speak of his love for Lucia till 
Venusta pressed him, making parade of great 
sympathy for him. But when he had set his 
tongue to the task, he grew eloquent, his eyes 
gleamed and his cheek flushed, and he spoke 
in the low reverent voice that a true lover uses 
when he speaks of his mistress, as though his 
wonted accents were too common and mean 
for her name. And Venusta sat listening, 
casting now and again a look at him out of her 
deep eyes, and finding his eyes never on hers 
but filled with the fancied vision of Lucia. 
And at last, growing impatient with him, she 
broke out petulantly, “ Is this girl, then, differ- 
ent from all others, that you speak of her as 
though she were a goddess ? ” 

235 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


“I would not have spoken of her but that 
you pressed me,” laughed Antonio. “ Yet in 
my eyes she is a goddess, as every maid should 
be to her lover.” 

Venusta caught a twig from the ground and 
broke it sharp across. ‘ ‘ Boys’ talk ! ” said she, 
and flung the broken twig away. 

Antonio laughed gently, and leant back, 
resting on the rock. ‘ ‘ May be,” said he. 

Yet is there none who talks boys’ talk for 
you ? ” 

“ I love men,” said she, “ not boys. And if 
I were a man, I think I would love a woman, 
not a goddess.” 

“It is Heaven’s chance, I doubt not,” said 
Antonio, laughing again. “Had you and I 
chanced to love, we should not have quarrelled 
with the boys’ talk nor at the name of god- 
dess.” 

She flushed suddenly and bit her lip, but 
she answered in raillery, “ Indeed had it been 
so, a marvel of a lover I should have had ! 
For you have not seen your mistress for many 
many months, and yet you are faithful to her. 
Are you not, my lord ? ” 

“ Small credit not to wander where you love 
to rest,” said Antonio. 

“And yet youth goes in waiting, and delights 
236 


ANTONIO AND LADY OF RILANO 


missed come not again,” said she, leaning 
towards him with a light in her eyes, and 
scanning his fair hair and bronzed cheek, his 
broad shoulders and the sinewy hands that 
nursed his knee. 

“ It may well be that they will not come to 
me,” he said. “For the Duke has a halter 
ready for my throat, if by force or guile he can 
take me.” 

She started at these words, searching his face ; 
but he was calm and innocent of any hidden 
meaning. She forced a laugh as she said, twist- 
ing a curl of her hair round her finger, “ The 
more reason to waste no time, my lord An- 
tonio.” 

Antonio shook his head and said lightly, 
“ But I think he cannot take me by force, 
and I know of no man in all the Duchy 
that would betray me to a shameful death.” 

“ And of no woman? ” she asked, glancing at 
him from under drooping lashes. 

“ No, for I have wronged none ; and women 
are not cruel.” 

“ Yet there may be some, my lord, who call 
you cruel and therefore would be cruel in 
vengeance. A lover faithful as you can have 
but one friend among women.” 

“ I know of none such,” he laughed. “ And 
16 237 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


surely the vengeance would be too great for 
the offence, if there were such.” 

“Nay, I know not that,” said Venusta, 
frowning. 

“ I would trust myself to any woman, even 
though the Duke offered her great rewards, ay, 
as readily as I put faith in Lucia herself, or in 
you.” 

“ You couple me with her ? ” 

“In that matter most readily,” said An- 
tonio. 

“ But in nothing else ? ” she asked, flushing 
again in anger, for still his eyes were distant, 
and he turned them never on her. 

“ Y ou must pardon me,” he said. “ My eyes 
are blinded.” 

For a moment she sat silent ; then she said 
in a low voice, “ But blind eyes have learned to 
see before now, my lord.” 

Then Antonio set his eyes on her; and now 
she could not meet them, but turned her 
burning face away. For her soul was in 
tumult, and she knew not now whether she 
loved or hated him, nor whether she would 
save or still betray him. And the trust he 
had in her gnawed her guilty heart. So that 
a sudden passion seized her, and she caught 
Antonio by the arm, crying, “ But if a woman 
238 


ANTONIO AND LADY OF RILANO 


held your life in her hand and asked your love 
as its price, Antonio ? ” 

“ Such a thing could not be,” said he, won- 
dering. 

“Nay, but it might. And if it were? ” 

And Antonio, marvelling more and more at 
her vehemence, answered, “ Love is dear, and 
honour is dear ; but we of Monte Velluto hold 
life of no great price. ” 

“Yet it is a fearful and shameful thing to 
hang from the city wall.” 

“ There are worse things,” said he. “ But 
indeed I count not to do it ; ” and he laughed 
again. 

Venusta sprang to her feet and paced the 
space between the cave and the river bank 
with restless steps. Once she flung her hands 
above her head and clasped them ; then, hold- 
ing them clasped in front of her, she stood by 
Antonio and bent over him, till her hair, fall- 
ing forward as she stooped, brushed his fore- 
head and mingled with his fair locks ; and she 
breathed softly his name, “ Antonio, Anto- 
nio ! ” At this he looked up with a great start, 
stretching up his hand as though to check her ; 
but he said nothing. And she, suddenly sob- 
bing, fell on her knees by him ; yet, as sud- 
denly, she ceased to sob, and a smile came on 
239 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


her lips, and she leant towards him, saying 
again, “Antonio.” 

“ I pray you, I pray you,” said he, seeking 
to stay her courteously. 

Then, careless of her secret, she flashed out 
in wrath, “Ah, you scorn me, my lord ! You 
care nothing for me. I am dirt to you. Yet 
I hold your life in my hand ! ” And then in 
an instant she grew again softened, beseeching, 
“Am I so hideous, dear lord, that death is 
better than my love ? For if you will love 
me, I wiU save you.” 

‘ ‘ I know not how my life is in your hands,” 
said he, glad to catch at that and leave the 
rest of what Venusta said. 

“ Is there any path that leads higher up into 
the mountains? ” she asked. 

“Yes, there is one,” said he; “but if need 
came now, I could not climb it with this 
wounded foot of mine.” 

“Luigi and the young men could carry you?” 

“Yes; but what need? Tommasino and 
the band will return soon.” 

But she caught him by the hand, crying, 
“ Rise, rise ; call the men and let them carry 
you. Come, there is no time for lingering. 

And if I save you, my lord Antonio ? ” 

And a yearning question sounded in her voice. 


ANTONIO AND LADY OF RILANO 


If you save me a thousand times, I can do 
nothing else than pray you spare me what is 
more painful than death to me,” said he, look- 
ing away from her and being himself in great 
confusion. 

“Come, come,” she cried. “Call them! 
Perhaps some day ! CaU them, Antonio.” 

But as she spoke, before Antonio could call, 
there came a loud cry from the wood behind 
the cave, the cry of a man in some great strait. 
Antonio’s hand flew to his sword, and he rose 
to his feet, and stood leaning on his sword. 
Then he cried aloud to Luigi. And in a 
moment Luigi and one of the youths came 
running; and Luigi, casting one glance at 
Venusta, said breathlessly, “ My lord, Jacopo’s 
foot slipped, and the poor fellow has fallen 
down a precipice thirty feet deep on to the 
rocks below, and we fear that he is sore 
hurt.” 

Venusta sprang a step forward, for she sus- 
pected (what the truth was) that Luigi himself 
had aided the slipping of Jacopo’s foot by a 
sudden lurch against him; but she said noth- 
ing, and Antonio bade Luigi go quick and 
look after Jacopo, and take the other youth 
with him. 

“But we shall leave you unguarded, my 
241 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


lord,” said Luigi with a cunning show of sohci- 
tude. 

“ I am in no present danger, and the youth 
may be dying. Go speedily,” said Antonio. 

Luigi turned, and with the other youth 
(Tommasino told Niccolo his name, but Nic- 
colo had forgotten it) rushed off ; and even as 
he went, Venusta cried, “It is a lie! You 
yourself brought it about!” But Luigi did 
not hear her, and Antonio, left again alone, 
asked her, “ What mean you ? ” 

“Nay, I mean naught,” said she, affrighted, 
and, when faced by his inquiring eyes, not dar- 
ing to confess her treachery. 

“ I hope the lad is not killed,” said Antonio. 

‘ ‘ I care not for a thousand lads. Think of 
yourself, my lord!” And planning to rouse 
Antonio without betraying herself, she said, “ I 
distrust this man Luigi. Is he faithful ? The 
Duke can offer great rewards.” 

“ He has served me well. I have no reason 
to mistrust him,” said Antonio. 

“ Ah, you trust every one ! ” she cried in 
passion and in scorn of his simphcity. “You 
trust Luigi ! You trust me ! ” 

“ Why not ? ” said he. “ But indeed now I 
have no choice. For they cannot carry both 
Jacopo and me up the path.” 

242 


ANTONIO AND LADY OF RILANO 


“Jacopo! You would stay for Jacopo?” 
she flashed out fiercely. 

“If nothing else, yet my oath would bind 
me not to leave him while he lives. For we of 
the band are all bound to one another as 
brethren by an oath, and it would look ill if I, 
for whom they all have given much, were the 
first to break the oath. So here I am, and 
here I must stay,” and Antonio ended smiling, 
and, his foot hurting him while he stood, sat 
down again and rested against the rock. 

It was now late, and evening fell; and 
Venusta knew that the Duke’s men should 
soon be upon them. And she sat down near 
Antonio and buried her face in her hands, and 
she wept. For Antonio had so won on her by 
his honour and his gentleness, and most of all 
by his loyal clinging to the poor boy Jacopo, 
that she could not think of her treachery with- 
out loathing and horror. Yet she dared not 
tell him ; that now seemed worse to her than 
death. And while they sat thus, Luigi came 
and told Antonio that the youth was sore hurt 
and that they could not lift him. 

“Then stay by him,” said Antonio. “I 
need nothing.” 

And Luigi bowed, and, turning, went back 
to the other youth, and bade him stay by 
243 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


Jacopo, while he went by Antonio’s orders to 
seek for some one to aid in carrying him. “ I 
may chance,” said he, ‘‘to find some shep- 
herds.” So he went, not to seek shepherds, 
but to seek the Duke’s men, and tell them that 
they might safely come upon Antonio, for he 
had now none to guard him. 

Then Antonio said to Venusta, “Why do 
you sit and weep ? ” 

For he thought that she wept because he 
had scorned the love in which her words de- 
clared her to hold him, and he was sorry. 
But she made no answer. 

And he went on, “ I pray you, do not weep. 
For think not that I am blind to your beauty 
or to the sweet kindness which you have be- 
stowed upon me. And in aU things that I 
may, I will truly and faithfully serve you to 
my death.” 

Then she raised her head and she said, 
“ That will not be long, Antonio.” 

“ I know not, but for so long as it may be,” 
said he. 

“ It will not be long,” she said again, and 
burst into quick passionate sobs, that shook 
her and left her at last breathless and ex- 
hausted. 

Antonio looked at her for a while and said, 
244 


ANTONIO AND LADY OF RILANO 


“ There is something that you do not tell me. 
Yet if it be anything that causes you pain or 
shame, you may tell me as readily as you 
would any man. For I am not a hard man, 
and I have many things on my own con- 
science that forbid me to judge harshly of 
another.” 

She raised her head and she lifted her hand 
into the air. The stillness of evening had 
fallen, and a light wind blew up from the 
plain. There seemed no sound save from the 
flowing of the river and the gentle rustle of 
the trees. 

“ Hark ! ” said she. “ Hark ! hark ! ” and 
with every repetition of the word her voice 
rose till it ended in a cry of terror. 

Antonio set his hand to his ear and listened 
intently. “ It is the sound of men’s feet on 
the rocky path,” said he, smiling. “ Tom- 
masino returns, and I doubt not that he brings 
your jewels with him. Will you not give him 
a smiling welcome ? Ay, and to me also your 
smiles would be welcome. For your weeping 
melts my heart, and the dimness of your eyes 
is like a cloud across the sun.” 

Venusta’s sobs had ceased, and she looked at 
Antonio with a face calm, white, and set. “ It 
is not the Lord Tommasino,” she said. “ The 
245 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


men you hear are the Duke’s men ; ” and then 
and there she told him the whole. Yet she 
spoke as though neither he nor any other were 
there, but as though she rehearsed for her own 
ear some lesson that she had learnt ; so lifeless 
and monotonous was her voice as it related 
the shameful thing. And at last she ended 
saying, “ Thus in an hour you will be dead, or 
captured and held for a worse death. It is I 
who have done it.” And she bent her head 
again to meet her hands ; yet she did not 
cover her face, but rested her chin on her 
hands, and her eyes were fixed immovably on 
Count Antonio. 

For the space of a minute or two he sat 
silent. Then he said, “ I fear, then, that Tom- 
masino and the rest have had a fight against 
great odds. But they are stout fellows, Tom- 
masino, and old Bena, and the rest. I hope 
it is well with them.” Then, after a pause, 
he went on, “Yes, the sound of the steps 
comes nearer. They will be here before long 
now. But I had not thought it of Luigi. 
The rogue ! I trust they will not find the 
two lads.” 

Venusta sat silent, waiting for him to re- 
proach her. He read her thought on her face, 
and he smiled at her, and said to her, “Go 
246 


ANTONIO AND LADY OF RILANO 


and meet them ; or go, if you will, away up 
the path. For you should not be here when 
the end comes.” 

Then she flung herself at his feet, asking 
forgiveness, but finding no word for her 
prayer. “ Ay, ay,” said he gently. “But of 
God you must ask it in prayers and good 
deeds.” And he dragged himself to the cave 
and set himself with his back against the rock 
and his face towards the path along which the 
Duke’s men must come. And he called again 
to Venusta, saying, “ I pray you, do not stay 
here. ” But she heeded him not, but sat again 
on the ground, her chin resting on her hands 
and her eyes on his. 

“ Hark, they are near now ! ” said he. And 
he looked round at sky and trees, and at the 
rippling swift river, and at the long dark 
shadows of the hills; and he listened to the 
faint sounds of the birds and living creatures 
in the wood. And a great lust of life came 
over him, and for a moment his lip quivered 
and his head fell; he was very loth to die. 
Yet soon he smiled again and raised his head, 
and so leant easily against the rock. 

Now the lord Lorenzo and his twenty men, 
conceiving that the Lieutenant of the Guard 
could without difficulty hold Tommasino, had 
247 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


come along leisurely, desiring to be in good 
order and not weary when they met Antonio ; 
for they feared him. And thus it was evening 
when they came near the cave and halted a 
moment to make their plans ; and here Luigi 
met them and told them how Antonio was 
alone and unguarded. But Lorenzo desired, 
if it were possible, to take Antonio alive and 
carry him alive to the Duke, knowing that 
thus he would win His Highness’s greatest 
thanks. And while they talked of how this 
might best be effected, they in their turn heard 
the sound of men coming up the road, this 
sound being made by Tommasino, Bena, and 
their party, who had ridden as fast as the wear- 
iness of their horses let them. But because 
they had ridden fast, their horses were foun- 
dered, and they had dismounted, and were 
now coming on foot ; and Lorenzo heard them 
coming just as he also had decided to go for- 
ward on foot, and had caused the horses to be 
led into the wood and tethered there. And 
he asked, “ Who are these ? ” 

Then one of his men, a skilled woodsman 
and hunter, listening, answered, “ They are 
short of a dozen, my lord. They must be 
come with tidings from the Lieutenant of the 
Guard. For they would be more if the Lieu- 
248 


ANTONIO AND LADY OF RILANO 


tenant came himself, or if by chance Tomma- 
sino’s band had eluded him.” 

“ Come,” said Lorenzo. ‘‘ The capture of 
the Count must be ours, not theirs. Let us 
go forward without delay.” 

Thus Lorenzo and his men pushed on; and 
but the half of a mile behind came Tommasino 
and his ; and again, three or four miles behind 
them, came the Lieutenant and his ; and all 
these companies were pressing on towards the 
cave where Antonio and Venusta were. But 
Tommasino ’s men still marched the quicker, 
and they gained on Lorenzo, while the Lieu- 
tenant did not gain on them ; yet by reason 
of the unceasing windings of the way, as it 
twisted round rocks and skirted precipices, 
they did not come in sight of Lorenzo, nor did 
he see them ; indeed he thought now of nothing 
but of coming first on Antonio, and of securing 
the glory of taking him before the Lieutenant 
came up. And Tommasino, drawing near the 
cave, gave his men orders to walk very silently ; 
for he hoped to surprise Lorenzo unawares. 
Thus, as the sun sank out of sight, Lorenzo 
came to the cave and to the open space be- 
tween it and the river, and beheld Antonio 
standing with his back against the rock and his 
drawn sword in his hand, and Venusta crouched 
249 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


on the ground some paces away. WhenVe- 
nusta saw Lorenzo, she gave a sharp, stifled 
cry, but did not move : Antonio smiled, and 
drew himself to his full height. 

“Your tricks have served you well, my 
lord,” he said. “Here I am alone and crip- 
pled.” 

“ Then yield yourself,” said Lorenzo. “We 
are twenty to one.” 

“ I will not yield,” said Antonio. “ I can 
die here as well as at Firmola, and a thrust is 
better than a noose.” 

Then Lorenzo, being a gentleman of high 
spirit and courage, waved his men back ; and 
they stood still ten paces off, watching in- 
tently as Lorenzo advanced towards Antonio, 
for, though Antonio was lame yet they looked 
to see fine fighting. And Lorenzo advanced 
towards Antonio, and said again, “Yield your- 
self, my lord.” 

“ I will not yield,” said Antonio again. 

At this instant the woodsman who was with 
Lorenzo raised his hand to his ear and listened 
for a moment ; but Tommasino came softly, 
and the woodsman was deceived. “ It is but 
leaves,” he said, and turned again to watch 
Lorenzo. And that lord now sprang fiercely 
on Antonio and the swords crossed. And as 
250 


ANTONIO AND LADY OF RILANO 


they crossed, Venusta crawled on her knees 
nearer, and as the swords played, nearer still 
she came, none noticing her, till at length she 
was within three yards of Lorenzo. He now 
was pressing Antonio hard, for the Count was 
in great pain from his foot, and as often as he 
was compelled to rest his weight on it, it came 
near to failing him, nor could he follow up 
any advantage he might gain against Lorenzo. 
Thus passed three or four minutes in the 
encounter. And the woodsman cried, “ Hark ! 
Here comes the Lieutenant. Quick, my lord, 
or you lose half the glory I ” Then Lorenzo 
sprang afresh on Antonio. Yet as he sprang, 
another sprang also ; and as that other sprang 
there rose a shout from Lorenzo’s men ; yet 
they did not rush to aid in the capture of 
Antonio, but turned themselves round. For 
Bena, with Tommasino at his heels, had shot 
among them like a stone hurled from a cata- 
pult; and this man Bena was a great fighter; 
and now he was all aflame with love and fear 
for Count Antonio. And he crashed through 
their ranks, and split the head of the woods- 
man with the heavy sword he carried; and 
thus he came to Lorenzo. But there in amaze- 
ment he stood still. For Antonio and Lorenzo 
had dropped their points and fought no more; 

251 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


but both stood with their eyes on the slim 
figure of a girl that lay on the ground between 
them ; and blood was pouring from a wound 
in her breast, and she moaned softly. And 
while the rest fought fiercely, these three stood 
looking on the girl ; and Lorenzo looked also 
on his sword, which was dyed three inches up 
the blade. For as he thrust most fiercely at 
Antonio, Venusta had sprung at him with the 
spring of a young tiger, a dagger fiashing in 
her hand, and in the instinct that sudden 
danger brings he had turned his blade against 
her ; and the point of it was deep in her breast 
before he drew it back with horror and a cry 
of “ Heavens ! I have killed her ! ” And she 
fell full on the ground at the feet of Count 
Antonio, who had stood motionless in aston- 
ishment, with his sword in rest. 

Now the stillness and secrecy of Tom- 
masino’s approach had served him well, for he 
had come upon Lorenzo s men when they had 
no thought of an enemy, but stood crowded 
together, shoulder to shoulder; and several of 
them were slain and more hurt before they 
could use their swords to any purpose; but 
Tommasino’s men had fallen on them with 
great fury, and had broken through them even 
as Bena had, and, getting above them, were 
252 


ANTONIO AND LADY OF RILANO 


now, step by step, driving them down the path, 
and formed a rampart between them and the 
three who stood by the dying lady. And 
when Bena perceived this advantage, wasting 
little thought on Venusta (he was a hard man, 
this Bena), he cried to Antonio, “ Leave him 
to me, my lord. We have him sure! ” and in 
an instant he would have sprung at Lorenzo, 
who, finding himself between two enemies, 
knew that his state was perilous, but was yet 
minded to defend himself. But Antonio sud- 
denly cried in a loud voice, ‘ ‘ Stay ! ” and 
arrested by his voice, all stood still, Lorenzo 
where he was, Tommasino and his men at the 
top of the path, and the guards just below 
them. And Antonio, leaning on his sword, 
stepped a pace forward and said to Lorenzo, 
“My lord, the dice have fallen against you. 
But I would not fight over this lady’s body. 
The truth of all she did I know, yet she has at 
the last died that I might live. See, my men 
are between you and your men.” 

“ It is the hazard of war,” said Lorenzo. 

“ Ay,” said Bena. “ He had killed you, my 
lord Antonio, had we not come.” 

But Antonio pointed to the body of Venus- 
ta. And she, at the instant, moaned again, 
and turned on her back, and gasped, and died: 

17 253 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


yet just before she died, her eyes sought An- 
tonio’s eyes, and he dropped suddenly on his 
knees beside her, and took her hand and kissed 
her brow. And they saw that she smiled in 
dying. 

Then Lorenzo brushed a hand across his eyes 
and said to Antonio, “ Suffer me to go back 
with my men, and for a week there shall be a 
truce between us.” 

“ Let it be so,” said Antonio. 

And Bena smiled, for he knew that the Lieu- 
tenant of the Guard must now be near at hand. 
But this he did not tell Antonio, fearing that 
Antonio would tell Lorenzo. Then Lorenzo, 
with uncovered head, passed through the rank 
of Tommasino’s men ; and he took up his dead, 
and with them went down the path, leaving 
Venusta where she lay. And when he had 
gone two miles, he met the Lieutenant and his 
party, pressing on. Yet when the two com- 
panies had joined, they were no more than 
seventeen whole and sound men, so many of 
Lorenzo’s had Tommasino’s party slain or hurt. 
Therefore Lorenzo in his heart was not much 
grieved at the truce, for it had been hard with 
seventeen to force the path to the cave against 
ten, all unhurt and sound. And, having 
sorely chidden the Lieutenant of the Guard, 
254 


ANTONIO AND LADY OF RILANO 


he rode back, and rested that night in Ve- 
nusta’s house at Rilano, and the next day rode 
on to Firmola, and told Duke Valentine how 
the expedition had sped. 

Then said Duke Valentine, “Force I have 
tried, and guile I have tried, and yet this man 
is dehvered from my hand. Fortune fights 
for him ; ” and in chagrin and displeasure he 
went into his cabinet, and spoke to no man, 
and showed himself nowhere in the city, for 
the space of three days. But the townsmen, 
though they dared make no display, rejoiced 
that Antonio was safe, and the more because 
the Duke had laid so cunning and treacherous 
a snare for him. 

Now Antonio, Tommasino, and the rest, 
when they were left alone, stood round the 
corpse of Venusta, and Antonio told them 
briefly all the story of her treachery as she 
herself had told it to him. 

And when he finished the tale, Bena cried, 
“ She has deserved her death.” 

But Tommasino stooped down and com- 
posed her limbs and her raiment gently with 
his hand, and when he rose up his eyes were 
dim, and he said, “Yes; but at the last she 
gave her life for Antonio. And though she 
deserved death, it grieves me that she is gone 
255 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


to her account thus, without confession, par- 
don, or the rites of Holy Church.” 

Then Antonio said, ‘‘ Behold, her death is 
her confession, and the same should be her 
pardon. And for the rites ” 

He bent over her, and he dipped the tip of 
his finger in the lady’s blood that had flowed 
from her wounded breast; and lightly with his 
finger-tip he signed the Cross in her own blood 
on her brow. “ That,” said he, “ shall be her 
Unction ; and I think, Tommasino, it will 
serve.” 

Thus the Lady Venusta died, and they car- 
ried her body down to Rilano and buried it 
there. And in after- days a tomb was raised 
over her, which may still be seen. But Count 
Antonio, being rejoined by such of his com- 
pany as had escaped by flight from the pursuit 
of the Duke’s troop, abode still in the hills, 
and albeit that his force was less, yet by the 
dread of his name and of the deeds that he 
had done he still defied the power of the 
Duke, and was not brought to submission. 

And whether the poor youth whom Luigi 
pushed over the precipice lived or died, Niccolo 
knew not. But Luigi, having entered the ser- 
vice of the Duke, played false to him also, 
and, being convicted on sure evidence of tak- 
256 


ANTONIO AND LADY OF RILANO 


ing to himself certain moneys that the Duke 
had charged him to distribute to the poor, was 
hanged in the great square a year to the very 
day after Venusta died ; whereat let him 
grieve who will ; I grieve not. 


257 


CHAPTER VIII 


THE MANNER OF COUNT ANTONIO’S RETURN 

In all that I have written concerning Count 
Antonio, I have striven to say that only which 
is surely based on truth and attested by cred- 
ible witness, and have left on one side the 
more marvellous tales such as the credulity of 
ignorance and the fond licence of legend are 
wont to weave. But as to the manner of his 
return there is no room for uncertainty, for 
the whole account of it was recorded in the 
archives of the city by order of Duke Valen- 
tine the Good, son and successor to that Duke 
who outlawed Antonio ; to which archives I, 
Ambrose, have had full access ; and I have 
now free permission to make known so much 
of them as may serve for the proper under- 
standing of the matter. And this same task 
is one to which I set my pen willingly, con- 
ceiving that the story is worthy of being 
known to every man in the Duchy ; for while 
many may censure the things that Antonio 
did in the days of his sojourn in the hills, there 
can, I think, be none that will not look with 
258 


MANNER OF ANTONIO’S RETURN 


approval on his bearing in this last hap of for- 
tune. Indeed he was a gallant gentleman ; 
and if, for that, I forgive him his sins too 
readily, in like manner may our good St. Fris- 
ian intercede that my sins be forgiven me. 

Five years had the Count dwelt in the hills; 
five years had the Lady Lucia mourned in the 
city ; five years had Duke Valentine laid plans 
and schemes. Then it fell out that a sickness 
came upon the city and the country round it ; 
many died, and more were sore stricken but by 
the mercy of God narrowly escaped. Among 
those that suffered were the Duke himself, 
and at the same time a certain gentleman, by 
name Count Philip of Garda, a friend of An- 
tonio’s, and yet an obedient servant to the 
Duke. Now when Antonio heard that Philip 
lay sick, he sent to him a rich gift of choice 
meats and fruits by the hand of Tommasino. 
And Tommasino came with six of the band 
and delivered the gift, and might have ridden 
back in all safety, as did the six who came 
with him. But Philip had a fair daughter, 
and Tommasino, caught by her charms, made 
bold to linger at Philip’s house, trusting that 
his presence there would not be known to the 
Duke, and venturing his own neck for the 
smiles of red lips and the glances of bright 
259 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


eyes, as young men have since this old world 
began. But one of the Duke’s spies, of whom 
he maintained many, brought word to him of 
Tommasino’s rashness; and as Tommasino at 
last rode forth privily in the evening, singing a 
love-song and hugging in his bosom a glove 
that the lady had suffered him to carry off, he 
came suddenly into an ambush of the Duke’s 
Guard, was pulled violently from his horse, 
and before he could so much as draw his 
sword, behold, his arms were seized, and the 
Lord Lorenzo stood before him, with doffed 
cap and mocking smile ! 

‘‘My glove is hke to cost me dear,” said 
Tommasino. 

“ Indeed, my lord,” answered Lorenzo, “ I 
fear there will be a reckoning for it.” Then 
he gave the word, and they set Tommasino 
bound on his horse, and rode without drawing 
rein to the city. And when the Duke heard 
the next morning of Tommasino’s capture, 
he raised himself on his couch, where he lay in 
the shade by the fish-pond under the wall of 
his garden. “ This is sweet medicine for my 
sickness,” said he. “ On the third day fi’om 
now, at noon, he shall die. Bid them raise 
a great gibbet in front of my Palace, so high 
that it shall be seen from every part of the city 
260 


MANNER OF ANTONIO’S RETURN 


and from beyond the walls; and on that gib- 
bet Tommasino shall hang, that all men may 
know that I, Valentine, am Duke and Lord 
of Firmola.” And he lay back again, pale and 
faint. 

But when word came to Antonio that Tom- 
masino was taken, he withdrew himself from 
the rest of the band who were lamenting the 
untoward chance, and walked by himself to 
and fro for a long while. And he gazed once 
on the picture of the Lady Lucia which was 
always round his neck. Then he sat down 
and wrote a letter to the Duke, saying, ‘‘ My 
gracious lord, I am here with fifty men, stout 
and brave fellows ; and if my cousin dies, there 
shall be no peace in the Duchy. But my 
heart is heavy already for those that have died 
in my quarrel, and I may not endure Tomma- 
sino’s death. Therefore let Tommasino go, 
and grant full pardon and oblivion to him and 
to all who are here with me, and swear to do 
this with a binding oath ; and then I will come 
and deliver myself to you, and suffer such 
doom as seems good to Your Highness. May 
Almighty God assuage Your Highness’s sick- 
ness and keep you in all things. — Antonio of 
Monte Velluto.” And this letter he sent to 
the Duke Valentine, who, having received it, 
261 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


pondered long, but at last said to Lorenzo, “ I 
do not love to let Tommasino go, nor to 
pardon these lawless knaves ; yet for five years 
I have pursued Antonio and have not taken 
him. And I am weary, and the country is 
racked and troubled by our strife.” 

“With Antonio dead, all would be quiet, 
my lord,” said Lorenzo. 

Then the Duke’s eyes flashed and he said, 
“ It shall be so. And bid them strengthen the 
gibbet, for Antonio is a large man ; and he 
shall surely hang on it.” 

Now Lorenzo was somewhat grieved, for he 
esteemed Antonio ; yet he obeyed the Duke’s 
commands, and took from the Duke a letter 
for Antonio, wherein His Highness swore to 
all that Antonio asked, and bade him come 
alone or with one companion only into the city 
on the day that had been before appointed for 
the hanging of Tommasino. And, further, the 
lord Lorenzo gathered together all the pike- 
men and every man that served the Duke, and 
placed them all on guard, and proclaimed that 
any man besides found carrying arms in the 
city should be held as the Duke’s enemy. For 
he feared that the townsmen who loved An- 
tonio would attempt something on his behalf. 
But when the townsmen saw the great force 
262 


MANNER OF ANTONIO’S RETURN 


that Lorenzo had gathered, they dared attempt 
nothing, although they were sore grieved and 
lamented bitterly. And the Lady Lucia, look- 
ing from the window of her house, beheld those 
who were erecting the gibbet, and wept for her 
lover. As for Tommasino, when he heard that 
he was not to be hanged, but to be set free, 
and Antonio to suffer death in his stead, he 
was like a man mad, and his rage and grief 
could not be restrained ; for he declared that 
he would not live if Antonio died, and did not 
cease to reproach himself bitterly. Therefore 
the lord Lorenzo held him confined in his 
own house, lest he should do himself some 
harm, or endeavour by some desperate device 
to prevent Antonio from fulfilling his purpose ; 
but he treated him with all courtesy, for he 
was sorry for his plight. 

Now Count Antonio feared his companions, 
and did not dare to tell them of what he had 
done, lest their obedience should fail under a 
strain so great, and they should by force pre- 
vent his going to the city. Therefore he told 
them to rest quiet in their camp, while he, 
with Bena, went about certain necessary busi- 
ness ; and he bade them farewell, enjoining 
them most strictly to do nothing against the 
Duke. 


263 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


“For,” said he, “although I may not tell 
you fully what the business is on which I go, 
yet I have good hope that His Highness is 
favourably inclined to you, and that in a short 
space you will receive from him pardon for all 
your offences. And that pardon I charge you 
to accept with gratitude, and, having accept- 
ed it, be thenceforward loyal servants to His 
Highness.” 

“ But will the Duke pardon you also, my 
lord, and the lord Tommasino ? ” asked Mar- 
tolo. 

“ He will pardon Tommasino also,” answered 
Antonio. “ And be assured that I shall suffer 
nothing.” And having said this, he shook 
every man by the hand, thanking them for the 
love and service they had shown him ; and he 
and Bena were accompanied by all of them to 
the foot of Mount Agnino ; and there, in the 
early morning of the appointed day, Antonio 
mounted his horse and rode with Bena into 
the plain. And as they rode, Bena said to 
him, ‘ ‘ My lord, why does the Duke grant this 
pardon ? ” 

“Because I give him what he asks as the 
price of it, Bena,” answered Antonio ; and 
they rode on for a while. But when Bena saw 
that Antonio turned his horse not towards 
264 


MANNER OF ANTONIO’S RETURN 


Rilano, but directly across the plain towards 
Firmola, he said, “ My lord, whither are we 
riding? ” 

“We are riding to the city, Bena,” answered 
Antonio. ‘ ‘ There is no cause for fear : we go 
by leave and on the invitation of His High- 
ness.” 

“ But will he let us go again ? ” asked Bena. 

“You will be free to go when you will,” 
answered Antonio, “and me the Duke will 
himself send forth from the city when I am 
ready to go.” For I^orenzo had promised in 
the Duke’s name that Antonio’s body, after 
it had hung three days on the gibbet, should 
be carried from the city to the church of St. 
Frisian at Rilano, and there interred with fit- 
ting ceremony. 

“ Yet I do not like this ride of ours,” grum- 
bled Bena. 

“Nay, I like it not myself,” said Antonio, 
smiling. “But for the good of my cousin and 
of all our company, we must go forward.” And 
he stopped for a moment and added, “Swear 
to me, Bena, by St. Frisian, to obey in all I bid 
you in the city to-day, and not to draw your 
sword unless I draw mine.” 

‘ ‘ Do I not always obey you, my lord ? ” 
asked Bena. 


265 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 

“ But swear to me.” 

“Well, then, I swear,” said Bena, “though 
in truth, my lord, your word is full as strong to 
me as any oath, whether by Frisian or another.” 
For this man whom they call Bena was a 
godless man, and one that held holy things in 
light esteem. But he was a fine fighter and a 
loyal servant, and God’s mercy is infinite. It 
may be his heart was turned at last ; though 
indeed I have found no record of it. 

“ My lord, will you see my Lady Lucia in 
the city? ” asked Bena. 

“ I trust at the least to see her face at her 
window,” answered Antonio. 

“Will you have speech with her, my lord? ” 

“ If His Highness will grant me that favour, 
Bena.” 

“ Ah, I know now why you smiled, my lord, 
as you rode, just now. It will be a bright day 
for you.” And Bena laughed. 

“ Indeed,” said Antonio, “ I trust that the 
day may be bright for me. Yes, bright as the 
light of heaven.” 

“ There is no light brighter than the eyes of 
the girl a man loves,” said Bena. 

“Yes, there is one,” said Antonio. But 
Bena did not understand his meaning. 

Thus they rode till it wanted only two hours 
266 


MANNER OF ANTONIO’S RETURN 


of noon ; and then they were within five miles 
of the city, and Bena, looking, beheld the 
great gibbet rising above the walls of the city 
and standing forth grim and black in front of 
the marble face of the Cathedral. 

“ What is that, my lord,” he cried, ‘‘ which 
towers above the walls of the city ? ” 

“ Is it not enough to know when we come 
there ? ” answered Antonio. 

Then Bena sighed, and said to Antonio, “ I 
find it in my heart, my lord, to be half sorry 
that the Duke pardons us ; for we lived a fine 
merry life in the hills. Yet it will be pleasant 
to live at ease ; and we have adventures enough 
to tell our sweethearts, ay, and our children 
too, when we grow old, and they come round 
us and ask us for stories of our youth. I hope 
my boys will be good at a fight, my lord, and 
serve your sons as I have served you.” 

It may be God’s will that I leave no sons 
to bear my name, Bena.” 

“ I do not think that,” said Bena with a 
laugh. 

They were now passing the hill on which 
stood the blackened walls of Antonio’s house, 
which Duke Valentine had burnt. 

Bena cried out at the sight. “You will 
need to spend much in rebuilding it,” said he. 

267 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


“Perhaps His Highness has provided an- 
other dwelling for me,” said Antonio. 

“To-night he will surely lodge you, my 
lord, in his own palace, or, may be, with my 
lord Lorenzo.” 

“ Wherever it may be, I shall sleep soundly,” 
said Antonio. 

Now they were come near to the city, and 
they saw a body of pikemen coming out to 
meet them, the Lieutenant of the Guard at 
the head. And when they met, the Lieuten- 
ant bowed to Antonio, who greeted him most 
courteously; and the pikemen spread them- 
selves in front and behind and on both sides 
of Antonio and Bena, and thus they went on 
towards the bridge and the city gate. But 
Bena eyed the pikemen with no love, and 
moved restlessly in his saddle. “These fel- 
lows,” said he to Antonio, “hem us in, my 
lord. Shall I make my horse threaten their 
toes a little, so that they may give us more 
room? ” 

“ Let them be,” said Antonio. “ It is not 
for long, Bena.” 

At the entrance of the gate stood Lorenzo, 
awaiting the Count, and there they dis- 
mounted, and Antonio passed through the 
gate with Lorenzo, Bena being close to him 
268 


MANNER OF ANTONIO’S RETURN 


on the other side. And when Bena saw the 
great force of pikemen, and, behind their 
ranks, a mighty throng of people, and when 
he saw the tall gibbet and understood what it 
was, suddenly his face went red and his hand 
flew to his sword. 

But Antonio caught his arm, saying, “ My 
sword is not drawn, Bena.” 

My lord, what does it mean? ” cried Bena 
in a loud voice, so that Lorenzo heard and 
stayed his steps and looked at Bena. “ Does 
he not know ? ” he asked of Antonio. 

“He does not know yet,” said Antonio. 
And to Bena he said, “ I have need of your 
sword, Bena. Give it me.” 

“ My sword, my lord ? ” 

“ Yes, your sword.” 

Bena looked at him with wondering fright- 
ened eyes ; but slowly he unbuckled his sword 
from his belt and gave it to Antonio. And 
Antonio unbuckled his own sword also and 
gave them both to the Lieutenant of the 
Guard, saying, “Sir, I pray you to restore 
Bena’s to him in the evening, and mine to me 
when I go forth to Rilano.” 

But Bena clutched at Antonio’s arm, crying 
again, “ What does it mean, my lord ? ” 

Then Antonio took him by the hand and 
18 269 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


said, “ Are we to be afraid now of what we 
have often faced together with light hearts, 
Bena?” 

“ Are we to die ? ” asked Bena. 

‘‘You are to hve and beget those brave 
boys, Bena. But it is otherwise with me,” 
said Antonio. 

Then the lord Lorenzo, who had looked in 
Bena’s eyes, signed to four pikemen to come 
near, and they came and stood near Bena ; for 
Lorenzo feared that he would not suffer An- 
tonio to die without seeking to save him or to 
die with him. 

“ Nay, let him alone,” said Antonio. “ You 
will obey me of your free will, Bena? ” 

“Yes, my lord,” said Bena; and he looked 
up at the gibbet; and then he caught An- 
tonio’s hand and kissed it a score of times ; 
and he began to sob as a child sobs. And the 
Guard, among whom were some that had felt 
his arm, marvelled to see him thus moved. 

“ Let us go on,” said Antonio. “ It is hard 
on noon, and I must keep my tryst with His 
Highness. ” 

“ His Highness awaits my lord by the fish- 
pond in the garden, ” said Lorenzo ; and he led 
Antonio to the palace and brought him 
through the great hall and so to the fish-pond ; 

270 


MANNER OF ANTONIO’S RETURN 


and by it the Duke lay propped on pillows, 
yet very richly arrayed; and his little son sat 
by him. Now Lorenzo stood aloof, but An- 
tonio came, and, kneeling, kissed the Duke’s 
hand, and then rose and stood before the 
Duke. But the boy cried, “Why, it is my 
lord Antonio ! Have you come back to live 
in the city, my lord Antonio? Ah, I am glad 
of it!” 

“ Nay, I have not come to live in the city, 
my little lord,” said Antonio. 

“ Whither do you go then ? ” asked the 
boy. 

“His Highness sends me on a journey,” 
said Antonio. 

“Is it far?” 

“ Yes, it is far,” said Antonio with a smile. 

“ I wish he would send another and let you 
stay ; then we could play at robbers again in 
the great hall,” said the little Duke. “ Father, 
can you find no other lord to go in Antonio’s 
place ? ” 

The Duke turned his face, pale and wasted 
with sickness, and his eyes, that seemed larger 
and deepei^' than they had been before, upon 
his son. I can send none but Antonio,” said 
he. And calling to Lorenzo, he bade him take 
the boy. But the boy went reluctantly, telling 
271 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


Antonio that he must return speedily. For 
you promised,” said he, “ to teach me how to 
use my sword.” And the Duke signed with 
his hand to Lorenzo, who lifted the boy and 
carried him away, leaving Antonio alone with 
the Duke. 

“I have set my seal to the pardons as I 
swore,” said the Duke ; “ and Tommasino shall 
be free this evening ; and all that he and the 
rest have done against me shall be forgotten 
from this hour. Have you any cause of com- 
plaint against me ? ” 

“ None, my lord,” said Count Antonio. 

“ Is there an3rthing that you ask of me ? ” 

“Nothing, my lord. Yet if it be Your 
Highness’s pleasure that I should have speech 
with the Lady Lucia and with my cousin, I 
should be well pleased.” 

“You will see them yonder in the square,” 
said the Duke. “ But otherwise you shall not 
see them.” 

Then Lorenzo returned, and he led Antonio 
to a chamber and gave him meat and wine ; 
and while Antonio ate, the lord Archbishop, 
having heard that he was come, came in great 
haste ; and the venerable man was very urgent 
with Antonio that he should make his peace 
with Heaven, so that, having confessed his sins 
272 


MANNER OF ANTONIO’S RETURN 


and sought absolution, he might be relieved of 
the sentence of excommunication under which 
he lay, and be comforted with the rites of the 
Church before he died. 

“ For there are many wild and wicked deeds 
on your conscience,” said the Archbishop, “and 
above all, the things that you did touching the 
Abbot of St. Frisian, and yet more impiously 
touching the Sacred Bones.” 

“ Indeed I have many sins to confess,” said 
Antonio ; ‘ ‘ but, my lord Archbishop, concern- 
ing the Abbot and concerning the Sacred 
Bones I have nothing to confess. For even 
now, when I stand on the threshold of death, 
I can perceive nothing that I did save what I 
could not leave undone.” 

Then the Archbishop besought him very 
earnestly, and even with tears ; but Antonio 
would own no sin in these matters, and there- 
fore the Archbishop could not relieve him from 
his sentence nor give him the holy comforts, 
but left him and returned to his own house in 
great distress of spirit. 

The lord Lorenzo now came again to An- 
tonio and said to him, “ My lord, it wants but 
a few moments of noon.” Therefore Antonio 
rose and went with him ; and they came 
through the great hall, and, a strong escort 
273 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 

being about them, took their stand at the foot 
of the palace steps. Then the Duke was borne 
out on his couch, high on the shoulders of his 
lackeys, and was set down on the topmost 
step : and, silence having been proclaimed, the 
Duke spoke to Antonio ; but so weak was his 
voice that none heard save those who were 
very near. “ Antonio of Monte Velluto,” said 
he, “ it may be that in God’s purposes I myself 
have not long to live. Yet it is long enough 
for me to uphold and vindicate that princely 
power which the same God has committed to 
my hands. That power you have outraged ; 
many of my faithful friends you have slain; 
against both me and the Church you have 
lifted your hand. Go then to your death, 
that men may know the fate of traitors and of 
rebels.” 

Antonio bowed low to His Highness ; but, 
not being invited by the Duke to speak, he 
said naught, but suffered Lorenzo to lead him 
across the square ; and as he went, he passed 
where four pikemen stood by Bena, ready to 
lay hold on him if he moved ; and Bena fell 
on his knees and again kissed Antonio’s hand. 
And Antonio, passing on, saw two young 
lords, followers of Lorenzo. And between 
them stood Tommasino ; their arms were 
274 


MANNER OF ANTONIO’S RETURN 


through Tommasino’s arms and they held 
him, though lovingly, yet firmly ; and he had 
no sword. 

“ May I speak with Tommasino ? ” asked 
Antonio. 

“ His Highness has forbidden it,” said Lo- 
renzo ; but Antonio paused for a moment 
before Tommasino; and Tommasino, greatly 
moved, cried piteously to him that he might 
die with him. And Antonio kissed him, and, 
with a shake of his head, passed on. Thus 
then he came to the gibbet, and mounted with 
Lorenzo on to the scaffold that was under- 
neath the gibbet. And when he was seen 
there, a great groan went up from the people, 
and the apprenticed lads, who were all gathered 
together on the left side of the gibbet, mur- 
mured so fiercely and stirred so restlessly that 
the pikemen faced round, turning their backs 
towards the scaffold, and laid their pikes in 
rest. 

Then the hour of noon struck from the 
clock in the tower of the Cathedral ; and the 
Master of the Duke’s Household, who stood 
by the couch of his master, turned his eyes to 
the Duke’s face, seeking the signal for An- 
tonio’s death; which when he received, he 
would sign to the executioner to set the rope 
275 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


round the Count s neck ; for the man stood by 
Antonio with the rope in his hand, and An- 
tonio was already in his shirt. But when the 
Master of the Household looked at the Duke, 
the Duke made him no signal; yet the Duke 
had not fainted from his sickness, for he was 
propped on his elbow, his face was eager, and 
his gaze was set intently across the square ; 
and his physician, who was near, spoke to him 
softly, saying, “ My lord, they await the signal.” 

But the Duke waved him aside impatiently, 
and gazed still across the square. And, seeing 
His Highness thus gazing intently, the Master 
of the Household and the physician and all the 
rest who were about the Duke’s person looked 
also ; and they saw the Lady Lucia coming forth 
from her house, clad all in white. Antonio 
also saw her from where he stood on the scaf- 
fold, for the people made a way for her, and 
the pikemen let her pass through their ranks ; 
so that she walked alone across the middle of 
the great square ; and the eyes of all, leaving 
Antonio, were fixed upon her. Her face was 
very pale, and her hair fell on her shoulders ; 
but she walked firmly and swiftly, and she 
turned neither to right nor left, but made 
straight for the spot where the Duke lay. 
And he, seeing her coming, moaned once, and 
276 


MANNER OF ANTONIO’S RETURN 


passed his hand thrice across his eyes, and 
raised himself yet higher on his arm, leaning 
towards her over the side of the couch. Again 
he passed his hand across his brow; and the 
physician regarded him very intently, yet dared 
not again seek to rouse his attention, and im- 
posed silence on the Master of the Household, 
who had asked in low tones, “ What ails His 
Highness?” Then the Lady Lucia, having 
reached the foot of the steps, stood still there, 
her eyes on the Duke. Very fair was she, and 
sad, and she seemed rather some beautiful un- 
substantial vision than a hving maiden; and 
though she strove to form words with her lips, 
yet no words came; therefore it was by her 
muteness that she besought pity for herself 
and pardon for her lover. But the Duke, 
leaning yet further towards her, had fallen, 
but that the physician, kneeling, passed his 
arm round his body and held him up ; and he 
said in low hoarse tones and like a man that is 
amazed and full of awe, and yet moved with a 
gladness so great that he cannot believe in it, 
“ Who is it ? Who is it ? ” 

And the Lady Lucia still could not answer 
him. And he, craning towards her, spoke to 
her in entreaty, “ Margherita, Margherita I ” 
Then indeed all marvelled; for the name 
277 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 

that the Duke spoke was the name by which 
that Princess who had been his wife and was 
dead had been called ; and they perceived that 
His Highness, overcome by his sickness, had 
lost discernment, and conceived the Lady 
Lucia to be not herself but the spirit of his 
dead love come to him from heaven, to which 
delusion her white robes and her death-like 
pallor might well incline him. And now the 
wonder and fear left his face, and there came 
in place of them a great joy and rapture, so 
that his sunk eyes gleamed, his lips quivered, 
and he beckoned with his hand, murmuring, 
‘‘ I am ready, I am ready, Margherita ! ” And 
while this passed, all who were too distant 
to hear the Duke’s words wondered that the 
signal came hot, but supposed that the Lady 
Lucia had interceded for Count Antonio, and 
that His Highness was now answering her 
prayer : and they hoped that he would grant 
it. And Antonio stood on the scaffold be- 
tween the lord Lorenzo and the executioner ; 
and his eyes were set on Lucia. 

Then the Duke spoke again to the Lady 
Lucia, saying, I have been lonely, very lonely. 
How pale your face is, my sweet ! Come to me. 
I cannot come to you, for I am very sick.” 
And he held out his hand towards her again. 

278 


MANNER OF ANTONIO’S RETURN 


But she was now sore bewildered, for she 
could not understand the words which His 
Highness used to her, and she looked round, 
seeking some one who might tell her what they 
meant, but none moved from his place or came 
near to her ; and at last she found voice enough 
to say in soft tones, “ Antonio, my lord, the 
Count Antonio ! ” 

“ Ay, I know that you loved him,” said the 
Duke. ‘‘But since then he has done great 
crimes, and he must die. Yet speak not of 
him now, but come here to me, Margherita. ” 

Then with wavering tread, she came towards 
him, mounting the first of the steps, and she 
said, “ I know not what you would, my lord, 
nor why you call me by the name of Mar- 
gherita. I am Lucia, and I come to ask 
Antonio’s life.” 

“ Lucia, Lucia ? ” said he, and his face grew 
doubtful. “Nay, but you are my Margherita,” 
he said. 

“ No, my lord,” she answered, as with trem- 
bling uncertain feet she mounted, till she stood 
but one step below where his couch was placed ; 
and then she fell on her knees on the highest 
step and clasped her hands, crying, “Have 
mercy, my lord, have mercy ! Think, my dear 
lord, how I love him; for if he dies, I must 

279 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


die also, my lord. Ah, my lord, you have 
known love. You loved our sweet Lady Mar- 
gherita ; was not her name now on your lips ? 
So I love Antonio, so he loves me. Ah, my 
lord, Christ Jesus teaches pity ! ” And she 
buried her face in her hands and sobbed. 

Then the Duke, his physician and now the 
Master of the Household also supporting him, 
stretched himself over the edge of his couch, 
and, putting out his hand with feverish strength, 
plucked the Lady Lucia’s hands away from her 
face and gazed at her face. And when he had 
gazed a moment, he gave a great cry, Ah, 
God ! ” and flung his arms up above his head 
and fell back into the arms of his physician, 
who laid him down on his couch, where he lay 
motionless, his eyes shut and his chin resting 
on his breast. And all looked at the physician, 
but he answered, Nay, he is not dead yet.” 

‘‘ Why tarries the signal? ” asked Antonio 
of Lorenzo on the scaffold. 

“ It must be that the Lady Lucia beseeches 
him for your life, my lord,” answered Lorenzo. 
“ Indeed heartily do I wish the Duke would 
hearken to her prayer.” 

“ He will not turn for her,” said Antonio. 

But presently the report of what had passed 
spread from those round the Duke to the pike- 
280 


MANNER OF ANTONIO’S RETURN 

men, and they, loving a marvel as most men do, 
must needs tell it to the people, and a murmur 
of wonder arose, and the report reached the 
guards at the scaffold, who came and told 
Lorenzo, in the hearing of Antonio, of the 
strange delusion that had come upon the Duke. 

“ He must be sick to death,” said Lorenzo. 

“ I pray not,” said Count Antonio. ‘‘ For 
though he is a stern man, yet he is an able 
and just prince, and this fancy of his is very 
pitiful.” 

“ Do you spare pity for him ? ” asked Lo- 
renzo. 

‘‘ Shall not I pity all who have lost their 
loves? ” answered Antonio with a smile, and 
his eye rested on the form of the Lady Lucia 
kneeling by the Duke’s couch. 

For hard on half an hour the Duke lay as he 
had fallen, but at last, his physician having 
used all his skill to rouse him, he opened his 
eyes ; and he clutched his physician’s hand and 
pointed to Lucia, asking, “ Who is she ? ” 

“ It is the Lady Lucia, my lord,” answered 
the physician. 

“And there was none else?” asked the 
Duke in a low tremulous whisper. 

“ I saw no other, my lord.” 

“ But I saw her,” said the Duke. “ I 
281 


saw 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


her even as I saw her last, when she lay on her 
bed and they took the child out of her dead 
arms.” 

It was the weakness of your malady, my 
lord, that made the vision before your eyes.” 

“ Alas, was it no more? ” moaned the Duke. 
‘‘ Indeed I am very weak ; there is a blur 
before my eyes. I cannot see who this lady is 
that kneels before me. Who is she, and what 
ails her? ” And having said this in fretful 
weary tones, he lay back on his pillow gasping. 

Then the Master of the Household came 
forward and said to him, “ My lord, this is the 
Lady Lucia, and she kneels before Your High- 
ness praying for the life of Count Antonio, 
because she loves him.” 

Now the name of Count Antonio, when 
spoken to him, moved the Duke more than all 
the ministrations of his physician; he roused 
himself once again, crying, “ Antonio ! I had 
forgotten Antonio. Does he still live? ” 
“Your Highness has not given the signal 
for his death.” 

“ Have I not? Then here ” 

He moved his hand, but with a great cry 
the Lady Lucia sprang forward and seized his 
hand before he could raise it, kneeling to him 
and crying, “No, no, my lord, no, no, no!” 

282 


MANNER OF ANTONIO’S RETURN 


And the Duke had no strength to fling her 
off, but he gasped, “Free me from her!” 
And the Master of the Household, terrified 
lest in her passion she should do violence to 
His Highness, roughly tore her hands from 
the Duke’s hand, and the Duke, released, sat 
up on his couch, and he said, in a strange hard 
voice that was heard of all, even to the scaf- 
fold, and yet seemed not the voice that they 

knew as his, “ Let Antonio ” But then 

he stopped; he choked in his throat, and, 
catching at his shirt, tore it loose from him. 

“Let Antonio ” he cried again. “Let 

Antonio .” And he sat there for an 

instant; and his eyes grew dim, the intelli- 
gence departing from them; once again he 
opened his lips, but nothing came from them 
save a gasp ; and with a thud he fell back on 
his pillows, and, having rolled once on his side, 
turned again on his back and lay still. And a 
great hush fell on every man in the square, 
and they looked in one another’s faces, but 
found no answer. 

For Valentine, Duke and Lord of Firmola, 
was dead of his sickness at the moment when 
he had sought to send Antonio to death. 
Thus marvellously did Heaven in its high pur- 
poses deal with him. 


283 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 

“ His Highness is dead,” said the physician. 
And the Master of the Household, as his duty 
was, came to the front of the Duke’s couch, 
and, standing there before all the people, 
broke the wand of his office, and let the 
broken fragments fall upon the marble steps ; 
and he cried aloud, “ Hear all of you ! It 
hath pleased Almighty God to take unto 
Himself the soul of the noble and illustrious 
Prince, Valentine, Duke and Lord of Firmola. 
May his soul find peace ! ” 

But there came from the people no answer- 
ing cry of “ Amen,” as, according to the cus- 
tom of the Duchy, should have come. For 
they were amazed at the manner of this death ; 
and many crossed themselves in fear, and 
women sobbed. And Lorenzo, standing on 
the scaffold by Antonio, was struck with won- 
der and fear, and clutched Antonio’s arm, cry- 
ing, “ Can it be that the Duke is dead? ” And 
Antonio bowed his head, answering, “May 
Christ receive his soul ! ” 

Then the Master of the Household came for- 
ward again and cried, “ Hear all of you ! Ac- 
cording to the high pleasure and appointment 
of Almighty God, the noble and illustrious 
Prince, Valentine, Second of that Name, is 
from this hour Duke and Lord of Firmola; 

284 


MANNER OF ANTONIO’S RETURN 


whom obey, serve, and honour, all of you. 
May his rule be prosperous ! ” 

And this time there came a low murmur of 
“ Amen ” from the people. But before more 
could pass, there was a sudden commotion in 
the square before the scaffold. For Bena, see- 
ing what was done, and knowing that the 
Duke was dead, had glanced at the pikeman 
who stood near; and when he saw that they 
looked not at him but towards where the 
Master of the Household stood, he sprang for- 
ward and ran like a deer to the scaffold ; and 
he leapt up to the scaffold before any could 
hinder him, and he cried in a mighty loud 
voice, saying, “ By what warrant do you hold 
my lord a prisoner ? ” 

Then the apprentices raised a great cheer 
and with one accord pressed upon the pike- 
men, who, mazed by all that had passed, gave 
way before them ; and the apprentices broke 
their bounds and surged like a billow of the 
sea up to the foot of the scaffold, shouting An- 
tonio’s name ; and the young lords who held 
Tommasino came with him and broke through 
and reached the scaffold ; for they feared for 
Lorenzo, and yet would not let Tommasino 
go : and Lorenzo was sore at a loss, but he 
drew his sword and cried that he would slay 
19 285 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


any man that touched Antonio, until the right 
of the matter should be known. 

“ Indeed, if you will give me a sword, I will 
slay him myself,” said Antonio. “ For I stand 
here by my own will, and according to the 
promise I gave to the Duke ; and if there be 
lawful authority to hang me, hang me ; but if 
not, dispose of me as the laws of the Duchy 
bid.” 

“ I have no authority,” said Lorenzo, “ save 
what the Duke gave ; and now he is dead.” 

Then the Count Antonio fastened his shirt 
again about his neck and put on his doublet ; 
and he signed to Bena to stand on one side of 
him, and he bade the young lords loose Tom- 
masino. And he said to Lorenzo, “ Let us go 
together to the Palace.” And now he was 
smiling. Then they came down from the scaf- 
fold and passed across the square, a great mul- 
titude following them. And when they came 
to the steps of the Palace, the Duke’s body 
was covered with a rich brocaded cloth that 
some hand had brought from his cabinet ; and 
the little Duke stood there with his hand in 
the Master of the Household’s hand ; and the 
child was weeping bitterly, for he was very 
frightened; and over against him stood the 
Lady Lucia, motionless as though she had 
286 


MANNER OF ANTONIO’S RETURN 


been turned to stone ; for the strange thing 
that had come about through her approaching 
of the Duke had bewildered her brain. But 
when the boy saw Antonio he let go the hand 
he held and ran to Antonio and leapt into his 
arms. Then Antonio lifted him and showed 
him to the people, who hailed him for Duke ; 
and Antonio set him down and knelt before 
him and kissed his hand. And the child cried, 
“ Now that my father is dead, Antonio, you 
must not go on your journey, but you must 
stay with me. For if I am Duke, I must 
learn to use my sword without delay, and no 
man but you shall teach me.” 

“ Shall I not go on my journey, my lord ? ” 
asked Antonio. 

“No, you shall not go,” said the little 
Duke. 

Then Antonio turned to the lords who stood 
round and said, “ Behold, my lords. His High- 
ness pardons me.” 

But the lords doubted; and they said to 
Antonio, “ Nay, but he does not know what 
he does in pardoning you.” 

“ He understands as well, I think,” said An- 
tonio, “ as his father understood when he sent 
me to death. Indeed, my lords, it is not 
children only who know not what they do.” 

287 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


And at this speech Tommasino smiled and 
Bena laughed gruffly. But the lords, bidding 
Antonio rest where he was till they returned, 
retired with the little Duke into the Palace, 
and sent word hastily to the Archbishop that 
he should join them there and deliberate with 
them as to what it might be best to do. And 
when they were thus gone in, Antonio said, 
“I may not move; but the Lady Lucia is 
free to move.” 

Then Tommasino went to the lady and spoke 
to her softly, telling her that Antonio desired 
to speak with her; and she gave Tommasino 
her hand, and he led her to Antonio, who 
stood within the portico, screened from the 
sight of the people. And there they were left 
alone. 

But meanwhile the whole body of the towns- 
men and the apprentices had gathered before 
the Palace, and their one cry was for Antonio. 
For the fear of the Duke being no longer upon 
them, and the pikemen not knowing whom to 
obey and being therefore disordered, the people 
became very bold, and they had stormed the 
Palace, had not one come to Antonio and im- 
plored him to show himself, that the people 
might know that he was safe. Therefore he 
came forward with the Lady Lucia, who was 
288 


MANNER OF ANTONIO’S RETURN 


now no more bewildered, nor petrified with 
fear or astonishment, but was weeping with 
her eyes and smiling with her lips and clinging 
to Antonio’s arm. And when the people saw 
them thus, they sent up a great shout, that 
was heard far beyond the city walls ; and the 
apprenticed lads turned and ran in a body 
across the square, and swarmed on to the scaf- 
fold. And then and there they plucked down 
the gibbet and worked so fiercely that in the 
space of half an hour there was none of it left. 

And now the Archbishop with the lords 
came forth from the council chamber, and the 
little Duke with them. And they caused the 
servants to remove the body of the dead Duke, 
and they set his son on a high seat, and put a 
sceptre in his hand. And the Archbishop of- 
fered up a prayer before the people ; and, hav- 
ing done this, he turned to Antonio and said, 
“ My lord Antonio, most anxiously have His 
Highness and we of his Council considered of 
this matter; and it has seemed to us all — my 
own in truth was the sole reluctant voice, and 
now I also am brought to the same mind — 
that whereas the virtuous purposes of Princes 
are meet to be remembered and made perpet- 
ual by faithful fulfilment after their death, yet 
the errors of which they, being mortal, are 
289 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


guilty should not overlive them nor be suf- 
fered to endure when they have passed away. 
And though we are not blind to your offences, 
yet we judge that in the beginning the fault 
was not yours. Therefore His Highness de- 
crees your pardon for all offences against his 
civil state and power. And I myself, who 
hold authority higher than any earthly might, 
seeing in what this day has witnessed the finger 
of God Himself, do not fight against it, but will 
pray you, so soon as you may fit yourself there- 
unto by prayer and meditation, to come in a 
humble mind and seek again the blessing of 
the Church. For in what you did right and in 
what you outstepped right, God Himself must 
one day judge, and I will seek to judge of it 
no more.” 

“My lord,” said Antonio, “I have done 
much wrong. Yet I will own no wrong in 
the matter of the Abbot nor in that of the 
Sacred Bones.” 

But the lord Archbishop smiled at An- 
tonio, and Antonio bent and kissed the ring 
that was on his finger; and the old man laid 
his hand for a moment on Antonio’s head, say- 
ing, “ It may be that God works sometimes in 
ways that I may not see.” 

Thus then it was that the Count Antonio 
290 


MANNER OF ANTONIO’S RETURN 


was restored to his place, and came again to 
Firmola; and, having been relieved of the sen- 
tence of excommunication that had been laid 
upon him, he was wedded in the Cathedral to 
the Lady Lucia as soon as the days of mourn- 
ing for the Duke had passed. And great was 
the joy in the city at their wedding; for every 
maid and every man saw in the triumph of 
Antonio’s love a sign of the favour of Heaven 
to those who love with a pure and abiding pas- 
sion. So they made great feasts, and were 
marvellously merry ; and Bena let not the day 
go by without phghting his troth to a comely 
damsel, saying with a twinkle in his eye that 
the Count Antonio would have need of his 
sons, whose services he had promised to him 
as they rode together across the plain on the 
morning when Antonio had supposed that he 
was to die. Nor would Bena give any other 
reason whatsoever for the marriage. Never- 
theless it is likely that there were others. But 
whether Bena fulfilled his promise I know 
not; for, as I have said, so little is known con- 
cerning him that his true name does not sur- 
vive, and it has proved an impossible thing to 
discover whether any of his descendants yet 
live in Firmola. If it chance that they do, I 
trust that they fight as well, and serve as loy- 
291 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


ally, and pray better than he. But Martolo 
has left those that bear his name, and a great- 
grandson of his is at this very time huntsman 
to the Monastery of St. Frisian, where I have 
seen and talked with him many times. 

The task which I laid upon myself thus 
finds its end. For there is no need for me to 
tell of the after- deeds of Count Antonio of 
Monte Velluto, nor how, in the space of a few 
months, he was chosen by all the lords to be 
Ruler and Protector of the State during the 
infancy of the Duke ; in which high office he 
did many notable deeds, both of war and peace, 
and raised the Duchy to a great height of 
power, and conferred many favours on the 
townsmen of Firmola, whom he loved and cher- 
ished because they had not forsaken him nor 
ceased to love him during all the years that he 
dwelt an outlaw in the hills. And he built 
again his house on the hill which Duke Val- 
entine had burnt, and dwelt there with Lucia, 
and with Tommasino also, until Tommasino 
took to wife that same lady for whose sake he 
had lingered and thus fallen into the hands of 
the lord Lorenzo, and went and dwelt at 
Rilano, where those of his house still dwell. 
But when the young Duke came of an age to 
reign, the Count Antonio delivered his charge 
292 


MANNER OF ANTONIO’S RETURN 


into his hand, yet continued to counsel him, 
and was very high in authority. And neigh- 
bouring princes also sought his aid and his 
counsel, and he was greatly honoured of all 
men. Thus if there were aught in his youth 
that merits censure, it may be held that he 
blotted out the shame of it by his after-life, 
for his latter days were filled with honourable 
service to his Prince and to his country. 

Yet the heart of man is a vain thing ; for 
when I, who am known to have learnt all that 
can be recovered from the mists of past times 
concerning Count Antonio, am asked — and 
whether it be by men or women, by boys or 
girls, ay, or by toddling infants — to tell them 
a tale of the great Count Antonio, it is not of 
the prudent ruler, nor of the wise counsellor, 
nay, nor even of the leader of the Duke’s 
army, that they would hear, but always of 
Antonio when he was an outlaw, banned by 
his Prince and by the Church, living by the 
light of his own heart and by the strength of 
his own hand, secured only by the love and 
duty of the lawless men who followed him, 
and risking his life every day and every hour 
for the sake of the bright eyes of that lady 
who waited for him in the city. And when 
I, thinking to check this perversity, bid them 
293 


CHRONICLES OF COUNT ANTONIO 


look rather on his more worthy and sober 
days, they answer with a laugh, “ But why, 
father, do you not write the story of those 
more worthy and sober days? ” Nor will they 
believe when I say that it is but because the 
deeds of those days are elsewhere recorded. 
In good truth, I believe that in our hearts we 
love a lawless man ! Here, then, ye perverse 
children, are the stories ; they are all that you 
shall have from me. Read them; may they 
teach you to be true comrades, faithful lovers 
of one maid, and, since strife must needs come 
until God’s pleasure bring peace to reign on 
earth, able, when occasion calls, to give and 
take good blows. Ay, never laugh. I have 
said it. A Churchman is a man. 


THE END 


294 










I 


I 

\ 


j 

I 

I 


i 

( 


f 

I 


I 

I 


i 

I 

I 


\ 

I 

r 


i 






i 

\ 


t 

I 


I 


( 

I 

( 

I 


* 




•j 

i 




) 

I 


j 


i 


i- 

'I 

IJ 










